JP6105691B2 - Game machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine provided with effect execution means.

  A general pachinko gaming machine is configured to include a game control unit that comprehensively controls games and an effect control unit that comprehensively controls effects (see, for example, Patent Document 1). In the game control unit, when a game ball wins at the start opening, a jackpot determination is made to determine whether or not to execute a jackpot game advantageous to the player, and after the special symbol is variably displayed on the special symbol display, A special symbol indicating the determination result of the jackpot determination is stopped and displayed. When a special symbol indicating that it is determined that the jackpot game is to be executed is stopped and displayed, the jackpot game is executed and the big prize opening is released.

  In one effect control part, a predetermined effect is performed with the game controlled by the game control part. In other words, when the special symbol is variably displayed on the special symbol display, a fluctuating effect is performed in which the decorative symbol is variably displayed on the image display device. When the stop display is performed, a decorative symbol indicating the determination result of the jackpot determination is also stopped and displayed on the image display device. Further, when the jackpot game is executed, a predetermined jackpot effect is performed in the image display device.

  Thus, in the effect control unit, a predetermined game effect is performed along with the game controlled by the game control unit.

JP 2012-90650 A

  An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of the effect by a specific effect different from the game effect.

  The present invention employs the following configuration in order to solve the above problems.

A gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine including a game control unit that controls the progress of a game and an effect control unit that controls an effect, and the game control unit, when a predetermined start condition is satisfied, Special game determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to a player, and special game execution means for executing the special game when it is determined by the special game determination means that the special game is executed The effect control unit includes a game effect executing means for executing a predetermined game effect in accordance with the game controlled by the game control unit, and a time for determining whether or not a predetermined time condition is satisfied. and condition determining means, when the predetermined time condition is determined by the filled and the time condition decision means, and the specific effect execution unit capable of executing a specific effect different from the game effects, given in the gaming machine And a error notification effect execution means for executing an error notification effect of notifying the occurrence of the error event, when the execution timing of the predetermined game presentation was running period of the specific effect, the predetermined game effects The specific effect is prioritized or emphasized, the error notification effect is prioritized or emphasized over the specific effect, and the specific effect is displayed in a predetermined display area of the display means before the execution time of the specific effect. The time until the start is displayed, and during the execution period of the specific effect, an effect display indicating that the specific effect is being executed is performed in the predetermined display area.

  According to this invention, it is possible to improve the interest of the effect by a specific effect different from the game effect.

Schematic front view of pachinko machine 1 Enlarged view of the display 4 in FIG. Schematic perspective view showing the internal structure of the specific region 9 Explanatory diagram for explaining the jackpot and gaming state Schematic diagram of a gaming system in which a plurality of pachinko gaming machines 1 are installed Screen diagram for explaining the flow of effects performed using main liquid crystal display device 5 The screen figure which shows a mode that the normal effect image currently displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 5 is reduced-displayed on specific conditions Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the flow of the new song announcement production performed in the pachinko machine 1 The screen figure which shows an example of the notification effect performed using the sub liquid crystal display device 6. Explanatory diagram for explaining the flow of the new song announcement production performed in the pachinko machine 1 after all new songs are announced The block diagram which shows the structural example of the control apparatus with which the pachinko gaming machine 1 is provided. The block diagram which shows the structural example of the image sound control board 140 Explanatory drawing for explaining the normal drawing process Explanatory diagram for explaining the drawing process during the announcement announcement or new song announcement Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the drawing process at the time of carrying out reduced display of a normal effect image The flowchart which shows an example of the timer interruption process performed in the game control board 100 Detailed flowchart of the switch process in step S2 of FIG. FIG. 17 is a detailed flowchart of the first start port switch process in step S21. Detailed flowchart of the second start port switch process in step S22 of FIG. FIG. 17 is a detailed flowchart of the gate switch process in step S23. Detailed flowchart of special symbol processing in step S3 of FIG. Detailed flowchart of jackpot determination processing in step S307 of FIG. Detailed flowchart of the stop process in step S319 of FIG. Detailed flowchart of normal symbol processing in step S4 of FIG. Detailed flowchart of electric tulip process in step S5 of FIG. Detailed flowchart of specific area release control processing in step S6 of FIG. Detailed flowchart of specific area release control processing in step S6 of FIG. FIG. 16 is a detailed flowchart of the special winning opening opening control process in step S7. Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the opening pattern of the special winning opening 13 and the production during the special game Detailed flowchart of the long hit game control processing in step S72 of FIG. Detailed flowchart of the short hit game control process in step S76 of FIG. Detailed flowchart of the gaming state setting process in step S745 in FIG. 30 and step S780 in FIG. The flowchart which shows an example of the timer interruption process performed in the production control board 130 FIG. 33 is a detailed flowchart of command reception processing in step S10. FIG. 33 is a detailed flowchart of command reception processing in step S10. FIG. 33 is a detailed flowchart of command reception processing in step S10. Block diagram showing a configuration example of the control ROM 144 The flowchart which shows an example of the timer interruption process performed in the image sound control board 140 Detailed flowchart of the measurement processing in step S2100 of FIG. Explanatory diagram for explaining the public management table Detailed flowchart of the state control process in step S2200 of FIG. Explanatory diagram for explaining the presentation permission status Explanatory diagram for explaining the presentation order management table Detailed flowchart of the notification effect control process in step S2300 of FIG. Detailed flowchart of the announcement notice effect control process in step S2400 of FIG. Detailed flowchart of the announcement notice effect control process in step S2400 of FIG. Explanatory diagram for explaining the relationship between the launch time of the announcement notice effect and the time required for the long open round game Explanatory diagram for explaining the relationship between the time for launching the announcement notice and the time required for the short hit game Detailed flowchart of new song announcement effect start process in step S2500 of FIG. Explanatory diagram for explaining the flow of the production when it is the start time of the announcement notice production in the customer waiting state Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the flow of the production | presentation when it becomes the start time of an announcement notice production | presentation in the state with the right of the 1st special symbol determination suspended. Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the flow of the effect when it becomes the start time of the announcement notice effect in the state where the right of the first special symbol determination is not reserved Explanatory diagram for explaining the flow of production when it becomes the start time of announcement announcement production during the long open round game Explanatory diagram for explaining the flow of production in the event that the start time of the announcement notice production is reached after the start of the final round during the long hit game or during the short hit game Explanatory diagram for explaining the flow of production when the normal production accompanying the change display of the special symbol does not end even if the new song announcement production start time Explanatory diagram for explaining the flow of production when the normal production accompanying the change display of the special symbol does not end even if the new song announcement production start time Detailed flowchart of the normal performance control process in step S2600 of FIG. Detailed flowchart of the normal performance control process in step S2600 of FIG. Detailed flowchart of the normal performance control process in step S2600 of FIG. Detailed flowchart of the normal performance control process in step S2600 of FIG. Schematic diagram of the default table Schematic of new song A main table Schematic of new song B main table Schematic diagram of new song C main table Schematic diagram of new song D main table Schematic diagram of new song E main table Schematic diagram of new song L main table Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the change of the image data used for drawing of a background image Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the change of the appearance rate of various background images Detailed flowchart of new song announcement effect end processing in step S2700 of FIG. Detailed flowchart of image output control processing in step S2800 of FIG. Detailed flowchart of the audio output control processing in step S2900 of FIG. Explanatory diagram for explaining the relationship between the time of announcement announcement effect and the variation time of special symbols Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the modification of a presentation permission flag Schematic diagram of all-mode table The screen figure which shows a mode that the announcement announcement effect image currently displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 5 on a specific condition is reduced-displayed Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the drawing process at the time of carrying out reduction display of the announcement announcement effect image or a new song announcement effect image Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the flow of other effects when the variation effect accompanying the variation display of the special symbol becomes the start time of the new song announcement effect but does not end Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the display aspect of the announcement notice effect image or new song announcement effect image in a hit effect Explanatory diagram for explaining the flow of three types of countdown display related to the new song announcement effect Screen diagram showing a specific example of the first countdown display A screen showing a specific example of the second countdown display Screen diagram showing a specific example of the third countdown display Screen diagram showing a specific example of a suggestion effect for a specific effect The flowchart which shows an example of the selection effect control process performed in the image sound control board 140 Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the production aspect of each production Explanatory diagram for explaining the flow of production when the SPSP reach production does not end even when the start time of the new song announcement production is reached Explanatory drawing for explaining the start trigger of specific production Explanatory drawing explaining the end trigger of a specific production Explanatory diagram illustrating the priority of each effect Screen diagram showing an example of the schedule screen showing the schedule of the new song announcement effect Block diagram illustrating the peripheral configuration of the lamp control board 150 Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the various control data stored in the storage area which the lamp control board 150 has The flowchart which shows an example of the 1st production | presentation actor control process performed in the lamp control board 150

[First Embodiment]
Hereinafter, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment of the gaming machine of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings as appropriate.

[Example of schematic configuration of pachinko gaming machine 1]
First, a schematic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. Here, FIG. 1 is a schematic front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1. In this embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a pachinko gaming machine called a type 1 / type 2 mixed type. As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is provided with a game board 2 provided with an accessory related to winning or determination, and a frame member 3 surrounding the game board 2. The frame member 3 supports a transparent glass plate arranged in parallel with the game board 2 at a predetermined interval. The glass board and the game board 2 form a game area 10 in which a game ball can flow down. Has been.

  When the player grasps the handle 20 and rotates the lever 21 in the clockwise direction, the game balls stored in the tray 28 are guided to the launching device (not shown), and the game is performed with the hitting force according to the rotation angle of the handle 20. Fired into region 10. This game area 10 is provided with game nails, windmills, etc. (not shown), and the launched game balls are guided to the upper position in the game area 10 and contacted with the game nails, windmills, etc. It falls along the game board 2 while changing the moving direction. Note that the game ball is temporarily stopped when the player operates the stop button 22.

  In addition, when the player operates the take-out button 23 that is disposed close to the tray 28, a part of the lower surface of the tray 28 is opened, and the game balls accumulated on the tray 28 are disposed below the tray 28 (not shown). Fall into the box. The dish 28 may be constituted by two dishes, an upper dish for storing game balls and prize balls supplied to the launching device, and a lower dish for collecting prize balls.

  When the player performs a so-called “left strike” in which the handle 20 is rotated at a small rotation angle, the game ball is launched with a relatively weak hitting force. In this case, the game ball flows down the left area in the game area 10 as exemplified by the arrow 31. On the other hand, when the player performs a so-called “right strike” in which the handle 20 is rotated at a large rotation angle, the game ball is launched with a relatively strong hitting force. In this case, the game ball flows down the right region in the game region 10 as illustrated by the arrow 32.

  A first starting port 11, a second starting port 12, two normal winning ports 14, and an electric tulip 17 are provided in the passing path of the left-handed game ball as an accessory related to winning or determination. In addition, in the passing path of the right-handed game ball, the second starting port 12, the big winning port 13, the two normal winning ports 14, the gate 16, the electric tulip 17, and the specified character are used as the winning and determination-related items. A winning opening 19 and a blade member 90 are provided.

  The game ball launched into the game area 10 enters the first start port 11, the second start port 12, the big winning port 13, and the normal winning port 14 in the process of flowing down along the game board 2. And win. As a result, a predetermined number of prize balls corresponding to the winning location are paid out to the tray 28. The game balls that have not won a prize are discharged from the game area 10 through the discharge port 18.

  The first start opening 11 as the first winning area is a start opening that is always open, and the second start opening 12 as the second winning area is operated by the electric tulip 17 as an ordinary electric accessory. It is a starting port that is opened only when In the pachinko gaming machine 1, when a game ball wins a prize through the first start port 11, or when a game ball wins a prize through the second start port 12, a special game advantageous to the player is executed? It is determined whether or not, and the determination result is displayed on the display 4 described later.

  In the following description, the determination executed on condition that a game ball wins the first start port 11 is referred to as “first special symbol determination”, and the game ball wins on the second start port 12 is a condition. The determination to be executed is referred to as “second special symbol determination”, and these determinations are collectively referred to as “special symbol determination”.

  The special winning opening 13 is a special winning area that is opened according to the result of the special symbol determination. A plate for opening and closing the big prize opening 13 is provided at the opening of the big prize opening 13. The special winning opening 13 is normally closed by this plate. On the other hand, when a predetermined jackpot symbol indicating that the result of the special symbol determination is a jackpot is stopped and displayed on the display 4, that is, when one kind of jackpot has occurred, the plate is operated to win a big prize opening. A special game of opening 13 is executed. For this reason, the player can obtain more prize balls by making a right strike during the special game compared to when the special game is not being performed. When a predetermined small winning symbol indicating that the result of the second special symbol determination is a small bonus is stopped and displayed on the display 4, a small member that activates the blade member 90 described later to open the specific winning opening 19 is displayed. A winning game is executed. During the small hit game, the V winning opening 92 (see FIG. 3) is temporarily opened, and a game ball wins the V winning opening 92 during this time, thereby generating two types of big wins. The big winning opening 13 is also opened when two types of jackpots are generated.

  The electric tulip 17 is disposed close to the second starting port 12 and has a pair of blade members. The electric tulip 17 is configured to change its posture between a closed posture (see FIG. 1) in which the pair of blade members closes the second starting port 12 and an open posture (not shown) in which the second starting port 12 is opened. ing.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the second start port 12 is normally closed by an electric tulip 17. On the other hand, when the game ball passes through the gate 16, it is determined whether or not the second start port 12 is to be opened, although no prize ball is paid out. Here, when it is determined that the second start port 12 is to be opened, the operation of returning to the closed posture after the pair of blade members of the electric tulip 17 has maintained the open posture for the specified time is performed a predetermined number of times. As described above, the second starting port 12 is in a state where it is difficult for the game ball to win when the electric tulip 17 is not operated, whereas the game ball is easily won by operating the electric tulip 17. Become. In the following description, the determination executed on condition that a game ball wins the gate 16 is referred to as “ordinary symbol determination”.

  The normal winning opening 14 is always open like the first start opening 11 and is a winning opening through which a predetermined number of winning balls are paid out by winning a game ball. Unlike the first starting port 11 and the like, even if a game ball wins the normal winning port 14, no determination is made.

  On the front side of the main liquid crystal display device 5 to be described later, a specific area 9 that is temporarily opened according to the result of the special symbol determination is provided. The specific area 9 will be described later in detail with reference to FIG.

[Configuration Example of Display 4]
FIG. 2 is an enlarged view of the display 4 in FIG. The display 4 mainly displays information related to special symbol determination and normal symbol determination. As shown in FIG. 2, the first special symbol display 41, the second special symbol display 42, and the first special symbol are displayed. A symbol holding display 43, a normal symbol display 45, a normal symbol holding display 46, and a game state display 47 are configured.

  When the first special symbol determination is performed, the first special symbol display 41 displays the determination symbol indicating the determination result of the first special symbol determination after variably displaying the symbol, thereby displaying the first special symbol determination. The determination result is notified. The first special symbol display 41 has a jackpot symbol indicating that the result of the first special symbol determination is a big hit (1 type big hit), or a lost symbol indicating that the result of the first special symbol determination is a loss. Is stopped.

  When the second special symbol determination is performed, the second special symbol display 42 displays the determination symbol indicating the determination result of the second special symbol determination after variably displaying the symbol, thereby displaying the second special symbol determination. The determination result is notified. The second special symbol display 42 has a jackpot symbol indicating that the result of the second special symbol determination is a jackpot (1 type jackpot), and a small hit indicating that the result of the second special symbol determination is a jackpot A losing symbol indicating that the symbol or the result of the second special symbol determination is losing is stopped and displayed.

  By the way, when a game ball is newly won at the first starting port 11 during the symbol variation display related to the special symbol determination or during the special game, the first special symbol determination and the symbol variation display are immediately triggered by this winning. Can not be executed. Therefore, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment seems to hold the right of the first special symbol determination when the first special symbol determination cannot be immediately executed even if a game ball wins the first starting port 11. It is configured. The first special symbol hold indicator 43 displays the number of hold of the first special symbol determination held in this way.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1, even if a game ball wins at the second starting port 12, the second special symbol determination and the symbol variation display cannot be executed immediately, that is, during the symbol variation display related to the special symbol determination or If a new game ball is won at the second starting port 12 during the special game, the second special symbol determination is not executed, and the right of the second special symbol determination is not held. For this reason, the display device 4 is not provided with a display device that displays the number of reserved second symbol determinations.

  When the normal symbol determination is performed, the normal symbol display 45 notifies the determination result of the normal symbol determination by suspending and displaying the determination symbol indicating the determination result of the normal symbol determination after variably displaying the symbol. Note that the normal symbol determination and the symbol variation display related to the normal symbol determination cannot be immediately executed even if the game ball passes through the gate 16, such as during the symbol variation display on the normal symbol display 45, for example. Judgment rights are withheld. The normal symbol hold display 46 displays the number of hold for normal symbol determination held in this way. The game state display 47 displays the game state at the time when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on. The gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described in detail later based on FIG.

  In the following description, the symbol displayed on the first special symbol display 41 or the second special symbol display 42 is referred to as “special symbol”, and the symbol displayed on the normal symbol display 45 is “normal symbol”. Shall be called.

[Configuration Example of Specific Area 9]
FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram showing the internal structure of the specific region 9. The vertical direction 34 and the width direction 35 in FIG. 3 correspond to the vertical direction 34 and the width direction 35 in FIG. The specific area 9 is an area where the game ball is opened so as to be able to enter when a small hit occurs, and a blade member 90 that opens and closes the specific prize opening 19 is provided in the specific prize opening 19 that is the entrance. Yes.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, a jackpot symbol indicating that the result of the special symbol determination is “big hit” is stopped and displayed as a determination symbol on the first special symbol display 41 or the second special symbol display 42. And, the first special game is executed with one kind of big hit.

  In the present embodiment, as the first special game, two types of special games, a long winning game and a short winning game, are provided.

  The long winning game is a state in which the grand prize opening 13 is opened until a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, nine game balls are awarded to the big prize opening 13 or 29 seconds have elapsed since the grand prize opening 13 is opened). A long open round game in which the special winning opening 13 is closed after being maintained is executed a prescribed number of times. In the present embodiment, two types of long games, 4R long games where long open round games are executed four times and 7R long games where long open round games are executed seven times, are games per long for one kind of big hit. A winning game is provided. In the long open round game, if the large winning opening 13 is long open so that a plurality of game balls can enter, the large winning opening 13 is opened and closed with an opening pattern different from the opening pattern exemplified in the present embodiment. You may do.

  The short win game is a short-opening round game in which the big prize opening 13 is closed after a predetermined time (for example, 0.2 seconds) has elapsed after the big prize opening 13 is opened and then the big prize opening 13 is closed. Is a 15R short game that executes a specified number of times (for example, 15 times). The prescribed number of times is not limited to 15 as long as it is plural. Further, in the short open round game, if the game ball is opened shortly so that it is difficult for the game ball to enter, the open game opening 13 is opened and closed with an open pattern different from the open pattern exemplified in the present embodiment. It may be.

  On the other hand, when the small hit symbol indicating that the result of the second special symbol determination is “small hit” is stopped and displayed as the determination symbol on the second special symbol display 42, the blade member 90 is operated to operate the specific region 9. A small hit game that releases is executed. In this small hit game, the operation of the blade member 90 that closes the specific area 9 after maintaining the state in which the specific area 9 is opened until a predetermined time (for example, 3.2 seconds) elapses after the specific area 9 is opened. It is executed a prescribed number of times (for example, once). In this way, when the small hit occurs, the game ball can enter the specific area 9.

  As shown in FIG. 3, the specific area 9 is provided with a guide member 91, a V winning opening 92, a lose winning opening 93, and a slide member 94. The guide member 91 guides the game ball that has entered the specific area 9 from the specific winning opening 19 to the V winning opening 92 or the lost winning opening 93. When a game ball wins the V winning opening 92 or the lose winning opening 93, a predetermined number of winning balls are paid out. The lose prize opening 93 is always open, whereas the V prize opening 92 is normally closed by the slide member 94 and is opened only for a predetermined period after the specific prize opening 19 is opened. Specifically, in this embodiment, for example, 0.5 seconds after the specific winning opening 19 is opened, the slide member 94 slides to open the V winning opening 92, and 0.2 V from the opening of the V winning opening 92. When the second elapses, the slide member 94 returns to the original position shown in FIG. 3, and the V winning opening 92 is closed.

  Then, two kinds of big wins are generated when a game ball wins the V winning opening 92 (V winning) during the opening period of the V winning opening 92, and the second special game including the already played small winning game is executed. The That is, when two types of big hits occur, the long hit game is executed following the small hit game. Specifically, following the small hit game that opens the specific area 9 for 3.2 seconds, the long win game consisting of three long open round games that open the long winning opening 13 long, or the big winning opening 13 A long hit game consisting of 14 long open round games that are long open is executed. That is, a total of 4R special games including one small hit game and three long open round games, or a total of 15R special games including one small hit game and 14 long open round games are executed. Is done.

  As described above, in the special game based on the 1st type jackpot, the first special game composed of the round game in which only the winning prize opening 13 is opened, whereas in the special game based on the 2nd type jackpot, the specific area 9 is opened. A second special game composed of a small hit game and a round game that opens the big prize opening 13 is executed. Note that if the game ball does not win the V winning opening 92 during the opening period of the V winning opening 92, the big winning opening 13 will not be opened following the small hit game, so the second special game is small. It will end with 1R of only winning games.

  In this embodiment, the case where the V winning opening 92 is opened and closed by the slide member 94 will be described. However, the V winning opening 92 is opened and closed by a blade member that rotates about the depth direction of the pachinko gaming machine 1 as an axial direction. It may be. In addition, the operation pattern of the blade member 90 during one small hit game (time and number of times for opening the specific winning opening 19) and the like can be appropriately changed.

[Description of changes in gaming state]
Next, the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. Here, FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the jackpot and the gaming state. As shown in FIG. 4, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the game is controlled in the “normal game state” or the “time-saving game state”.

  The “normal game state” is a normal game state in which a so-called electric chew support function is not given. Specifically, in the “normal game state”, when the second start port 12 is opened, the rate determined in the normal symbol determination is set to a relatively low rate (for example, 1/12), and the variation time of the normal symbol is set. A relatively long time (for example, 25 seconds) is set, and when it is determined that the second start port 12 is to be opened, the opening time of the second start port 12 is relatively short (for example, 0.1 second × 1). Game state set to (times).

  The “time saving gaming state” is a gaming state to which an electric chew support function is provided. Specifically, in the “short-time gaming state”, when the second start port 12 is opened, the rate determined in the normal symbol determination is set to a relatively high rate (for example, 12/12), and the variation time of the normal symbol is set. A relatively short time (for example, 2 seconds) is set, and when it is determined that the second starting port 12 is to be opened, the opening time of the second starting port 12 is relatively long (for example, 0.3 seconds × 5). Game state set to (times). In other words, the “short-time gaming state” is a gaming state in which the second start port 12 is more easily controlled to the open state than in the normal gaming state.

  Due to the board configuration of the game board 2, a game ball launched into the left area of the game area 10 can win the first starting port 11, whereas a game ball launched into the right area of the game area 10 There will never be a prize at the starting port 11. Further, the second start port 12 is unlikely to be in an open state in the “normal game state”. For this reason, there is no merit of making a right strike in the “normal game state”. In this way, the “normal game state” is a left-side advantageous state in which it is easier to hit a jackpot than hitting a game ball in the left area of the game area 10 than in the right area. 5 is left-handed according to the message displayed at 5 and the voice guidance output from the speaker 24.

  When the player makes a left strike in the “normal game state” and the game ball launched into the left area of the game area 10 wins the first start port 11, the first special symbol determination is performed and the first special symbol is determined. After the special symbol is variably displayed on the symbol display 41, the determination symbol indicating the result of the first special symbol determination is stopped and displayed. Here, when it is determined that the first special symbol is determined to be one type of big win, the first special symbol display 41 is stopped and the big special symbol indicating that is stopped and the first special game that opens the special winning opening 13 is performed. Executed. The gaming state is set at the end of the first special game in accordance with the type of jackpot symbol that has been stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 41 at the start of the first special game. In the present embodiment, as illustrated in FIG. 4, the “normal game state” is continued at a rate of 50% after the first special game is finished, while the remaining 50% is changed from “normal game state” to “ The gaming state changes to “short-time gaming state”.

  In the present embodiment, after the first special game is completed, the game is controlled in the normal gaming state, and as shown in FIG. 4, after the seven long open round games are performed as illustrated in FIG. There is a short per 7R when the normal gaming state is entered, and 50% of the one type large per 7R per short at this time. In addition, 15 times per 4R with time reduction that becomes short-time game state after four long open round games are performed as per time-short game where the game will be controlled in short-time game state after the end of the first special game. There are two types of short-acting short-term games that become short-time game states after the short-opening round game is completed, and 50% of the one-type game is one of these two types of short-timed games.

  When the gaming state shifts to the “time-saving gaming state”, the second start port 12 is more likely to be in the open state than in the “normal gaming state”. In addition, since most of the results of the second special symbol determination executed on condition that a game ball wins the second starting port 12 is a small hit, two types of big hits are likely to occur. As described above, the “short-time gaming state” is a right-side advantageous state in which a player hitting a game ball in the right region of the game area 10 is more likely to win a big hit than in a left-side region. 5 is performed in accordance with the message displayed on the screen 5 and the voice guidance output from the speaker 24.

  When the player makes a right strike in the “short-time gaming state” and the game ball launched into the right area of the game area 10 passes through the gate 16, normal symbol determination is performed. When it is determined that the second starting port 12 is opened when the normal symbol determination is performed in the “short-time gaming state”, the opening time of the second starting port 12 is longer than that in the “normal gaming state”. A game ball launched into the right area of the game area 10 easily wins the second starting port 12.

  In the “short time gaming state”, when the special symbol is not variably displayed and the game ball is won at the second starting port 12 when the special game is not being performed, the second special symbol determination is performed and the second special symbol display is performed. After the special symbol is variably displayed on the device 42, the determination symbol indicating the result of the second special symbol determination is stopped and displayed. Here, when it is determined that a small winning is determined by the second special symbol determination, the small special symbol indicating that is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 42, and the specific area 9 and the V winning opening 92 are temporarily displayed. The small hit game to be opened is executed, and the game ball is won in the V winning opening 92 during the small hit game, so that two kinds of big hits are made, and the second special game including the small hit game is executed. Then, the game state is set at the end of the second special game according to the type of the small hit symbol that is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 42 at the time of the small hit game. In the present embodiment, as illustrated in FIG. 4, the “short-time gaming state” is continued at a rate of 70% after the second special game is completed, while the remaining 30% is “from the short-time gaming state” to “ It will be returned to the “normal gaming state”.

  In the present embodiment, as a short hit per hour when the game is to be controlled in the normal game state after the end of the second special game, as shown in FIG. 4, one small hit game and three long open games There is a short time 4R per game that is in a normal gaming state after a round game is performed, and 30% of the two kinds of big time is per short 4R at this time. In addition, after the second special game, the game will be controlled in the short-time game state. As the short-time game, after one small hit game and 14 long open round games are performed, There are 2 types per 4R with a short time after a small hit game and 3 long open round games are performed per 15R with a short time, 70% per 2 types Is one of these two types of time savings.

  In addition, although detailed explanation is omitted, even when the second special symbol determination (or first special symbol determination) is performed 100 times in the “short-time gaming state”, the gaming state is not The “normal game state” is returned from the “short-time game state”.

[Configuration example of presentation means of pachinko gaming machine 1]
As shown in FIG. 1, the game board 2 or the frame member 3 has various functions such as a main liquid crystal display device 5, a sub liquid crystal display device 6, a logo accessory 7, a speaker 24, and a frame lamp 25. Is provided.

  The main liquid crystal display device 5 is an image display device that displays an effect image, and is provided at a position that is easily visible by a player. In the main liquid crystal display device 5, for example, various displays such as a decorative symbol for notifying the result of the special symbol determination, a character or item for performing a notice effect, a hold display image indicating that the first special symbol determination is held, etc. An effect image including the object is displayed.

  The sub liquid crystal display device 6 is an image display device that displays an effect image, and is provided above the main liquid crystal display device 5. As the sub liquid crystal display device 6, one having a display screen smaller than that of the main liquid crystal display device 5 is used. The sub liquid crystal display device 6 is mainly used for a notification effect for the effect performed in the main liquid crystal display device 5.

  In the present embodiment, a case where both the main liquid crystal display device 5 and the sub liquid crystal display device 6 are configured by a liquid crystal display device will be described. However, both or one of them is another type such as an EL display device. You may comprise by an image display apparatus.

  The logo accessory 7 is configured to be movable with respect to the sub liquid crystal display device 6, and for the purpose of guiding the player's line of sight to the sub liquid crystal display device 6, a notification effect is performed in the sub liquid crystal display device 6. Operate to vibrate prior to.

  The speaker 24 produces a sound effect by outputting music, sound, sound effects, etc. so as to synchronize with the display effect performed in the main liquid crystal display device 5 or the sub liquid crystal display device 6. The frame lamp 25 produces an effect by light by changing a light emission color, a light emission pattern, and a light emission direction.

[Configuration example of operation means of the pachinko gaming machine 1]
The frame member 3 is provided with an effect button 26 and an effect key 27 as operation means operated by the player. The effect button 26 is a push button for inputting operation information when pressed by the player. The production key 27 is configured to include a cross key for instructing one of up, down, left and right directions, and a center key located at the center of these keys. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, there is a case where an effect corresponding to the operation information input from the effect button 26 or the effect key 27 is performed.

[Main features of production performed on pachinko machine 1]
Hereinafter, the main features of effects performed in the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS.

  FIG. 5 is a schematic diagram of a gaming system in which a plurality of pachinko gaming machines 1 are installed. As illustrated in FIG. 5, in the so-called pachinko hall, one island is configured by arranging a plurality (for example, 20) of the above-described pachinko gaming machines 1 side by side. Each pachinko machine 1 installed on this island is electrically connected to the island power supply device 500 through a common island power supply line. Therefore, by turning on the power of the island power supply device 500 with the individual power switch of each pachinko gaming machine 1 set to “ON”, a plurality of pachinko gaming machines 1 installed on one island can be combined. Can be activated. As will be described in detail later, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment can start the same production at the same time in all the pachinko gaming machines 1 installed on the same island by using such an activation method. It has a configuration to do.

  FIG. 6 is a screen diagram for explaining the flow of effects performed using the main liquid crystal display device 5. For example, when the game ball is won at the first starting port 11 and the first special symbol determination is performed in the “normal gaming state”, the first special symbol display 41 is displayed on the display screen of the main liquid crystal display device 5. The decorative symbol indicating the result of the first special symbol determination is stopped at the timing when the determination symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 41 after the decorative symbol is variably displayed as the special symbol is displayed. Is displayed (see FIG. 6A).

  As described above, in the normal time, a normal effect using the main liquid crystal display device 5, the speaker 24, the frame lamp 25, and the like is executed along with the game using the game ball as the game medium. Here, the normal effect includes both a variation effect associated with a special symbol variation display and a winning effect associated with a special game. Note that this normal effect image is displayed in the entire area in this embodiment when only the normal effect is performed.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, a measurement process for measuring the elapsed time since the power is turned on is performed, and after the first set time (about 59 minutes in the present embodiment) has passed since the power is turned on, the new song Prior to the announcement effect (see FIG. 6C), an announcement announcement effect for performing an announcement that a new song announcement effect will be performed is executed. This announcement notice effect is related to the new song announcement effect and the contents of the effect. In this embodiment, the announcement of the new song document video reproduced in the new song announcement effect is played. In addition, in the announcement notice effect in the present embodiment, the remaining time until the new song announcement effect is started is counted down (see FIG. 6B). In the present embodiment, the announcement announcement effect image is displayed in an upper area, which is a partial area of the entire area. Note that the countdown display of the remaining time until the new song announcement effect is started is also performed in the sub liquid crystal display device 6 (see FIG. 9C).

  In this embodiment, the case where the announcement announcement effect is realized by movie playback of the document video of the new song will be described. However, if the announcement announcement effect is related to the new song announcement effect, for example, a new song announcement effect is given. Other effects such as an effect of playing a movie of a scene prepared by a member who sings a new song in a dressing room may be used as an effect suggesting the contents of the action.

  Next, at the timing when the second set time (1 hour in this embodiment) has elapsed since the power was turned on, a new song announcement effect (in this embodiment, playing a new song movie) that announces a new song as unreleased content is started. (See FIG. 6C). Unlike the announcement announcement effect, this new song announcement effect is forcibly started when the second set time elapses after the power is turned on, regardless of the game situation using the game ball. For this reason, by using the island power supply device 500 to start a plurality of pachinko gaming machines 1 installed on one island at the same time, it is possible to simultaneously start a new song presentation effect on these pachinko gaming machines 1 It is.

  By the way, the announcement announcement effect and the new song announcement effect are performed independently of the game using the game ball, but the game using the game ball continues while the announcement announcement effect and the new song announcement effect are being performed. Therefore, it is necessary to make the normal performance for this game parallel to the announcement announcement effect or the new song announcement effect. For this reason, in the pachinko machine 1, while the announcement announcement effect and the new song announcement effect are performed using the upper area from the start of the announcement announcement effect until the end of the subsequent new song announcement effect, A normal effect is performed using the lower area of the display screen of the display device 5 (see FIGS. 6B and 6C). In this way, the image of the new song announcement effect is displayed in the same upper area where the image of the announcement announcement effect is displayed, whereas the image of the normal effect is the whole until the announcement announcement effect starts. While displayed in the area, after the announcement notice effect is started, it is displayed in the lower area located below the upper area. In the present embodiment, in order to make the announcement announcement effect and the new song announcement effect stand out, a decorative pattern or the like of a normal effect is displayed in dots in the lower area.

  When the new song announcement effect ends, the state where the normal effect is performed using the lower area returns to the state where the normal effect is performed using the entire area. Then, in the normal production after the new song announcement effect is performed, an effect based on the new song announced in the new song announcement effect is performed. In other words, the effect data related to the new song that was not used in the normal effect before the start of the new song announcement effect can be used when the new song announcement effect is executed.

  The new song announcement effect is not executed only when one hour has elapsed since the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on. In this embodiment, the new song announcement effect is 1 after the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on. It is executed every time. That is, for example, when a new song announcement effect for new song A is executed when one hour has passed since the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, a new song announcement effect for new song A is performed every hour. The new song announcement effect for one new song is continued for one week after the first new song announcement effect of the new song is executed, and in the next week, new song announcements for other new songs are executed every hour. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, by repeating such processing, new song announcement effects for all 12 new songs are executed over a period of about three months. It will increase.

  In the following description, the entire area on the display screen of the main liquid crystal display device 5 is simply referred to as “entire area”, and the upper area on the display screen of the main liquid crystal display device 5 is simply referred to as “upper area”. A lower area on the display screen of the device 5 is simply referred to as a “lower area”.

  FIG. 7 is a screen diagram showing how the normal effect image displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 5 is reduced and displayed under a specific condition. If a decorative symbol is stopped and displayed as a result of the special symbol determination in the entire area between the start time of the announcement announcement effect and the start time of the new song announcement effect, the special symbol determination following the execution of this special symbol determination If the display mode of the normal effect is switched to the dot display in the lower region when the decorative symbol variation display is started, it is possible to suppress the interest of the normal effect from being impaired. On the other hand, if information necessary for a game using a game ball is not properly notified, the announcement announcement effect and the new song announcement effect may interfere with the game. For this reason, for example, as illustrated in FIG. 7, when a big hit occurs during the announcement announcement effect and it is necessary to notify the player to make a right strike, the normal effect image is displayed in the lower region. Instead of dot display, the upper area is reduced and displayed so as to be superimposed on the announcement announcement effect image or new song announcement effect image.

  FIG. 8 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an example of the flow of a new song announcement effect performed in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In addition, in order to show the flow of the new song announcement effect in an easy-to-understand manner, FIG. 8 shows the time when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on at 9:00 am. Also, for the convenience of explanation, the illustration of the announcement notice effect that is executed prior to the new song announcement effect is omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 8A, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is introduced into the pachinko hall on Saturday, 6/30, for example, a default normal performance is performed until one week has passed since the introduction. For example, two types of background images, a first default background image and a second default background image, are stored in advance as background images displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 5 in a state where no new song announcement effect has been performed. Until the first new song announcement effect of the new song A is executed, either the first default background image or the second default background image is displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 5.

  The first new song of the new song A when 3 hours have passed since the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 was turned on on Saturday, July 7th, one week after the pachinko gaming machine 1 was introduced into the pachinko hall The presentation effect is executed (see FIG. 8B). In FIG. 8 (B), since the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on at 9:00 am, the first new song announcement effect of the new song A is executed at exactly noon, and the new song A is announced every hour thereafter. An example in which an effect is executed is shown.

  When the first new song announcement effect of the new song A is executed, a normal effect that mainly uses image data relating to the new song A is performed. That is to say, taking a background image as an example, only two background images, the first default background image and the second default background image, can be used. A new song A background image created in advance based on the data can be newly used. The new song A background image is set to have a higher selection rate than the first default background image and the second default background image for one week when the new song announcement effect of the new song A is performed. It is displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 5 at a higher rate than the default background image.

  Subsequently, on Saturday, July 14, when one week has passed since the first new song announcement performance of the new song A was executed, when three hours have passed since the power to the pachinko machine 1 was turned on, the first song of the new song B A new song announcement effect is executed (see FIG. 8C).

  When the first new song announcement effect of the new song B is executed, a normal effect that mainly uses image data related to the new song B is performed. In other words, the background image will be described as an example. Although the three default images of the first default background image, the second default background image, and the new song A background image can be used, the first default background image cannot be used. Instead, a new song B background image created in advance based on the image data constituting the movie data of the new song B reproduced in the new song announcement effect can be newly used. Since the new song B background image is set to have a higher selection rate than the second default background image and the new song A background image for one week when the new song B presentation effect is performed, the second default background image and the new song A background are set. It is displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 5 at a higher rate than the image.

  In this way, every time the first new song announcement effect of each new song is executed, the available background images increase, and the background image related to the latest new song is displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 5 at the highest rate.

  Note that the new song announcement schedule illustrated in FIG. 8 is an example, and the first new song announcement effect of the new song A is performed on the first day of introduction of the pachinko machine 1, or the time interval at which the new song announcement effect of the same new song is executed Changes such as a time other than one hour or a non-constant time may be made.

  FIG. 9 is a screen diagram illustrating an example of a notification effect performed using the sub liquid crystal display device 6. For example, on the day before Saturday 7/7 when the first new song announcement of the new song A is performed, as shown in FIG. 9A, an effect image for notifying the remaining days until the first new song announcement date is displayed on the sub liquid crystal display device. 6 is executed. Also, for example, on Saturday, July 7, when the first new song announcement of new song A is performed, the first new song announcement effect is performed today as illustrated in FIG. 9B until the first new song announcement effect is started. A notification effect for causing the sub liquid crystal display device 6 to display an effect image for informing the user is executed. For example, when the remaining time until the start time of the new song announcement effect of the new song A becomes less than a predetermined time, the remaining time is counted down on the sub liquid crystal display device 6 as illustrated in FIG. 9C. The announcement effect to be executed is executed. Also, for example, when the first new song announcement effect for new song A ends, a notice effect for causing the sub liquid crystal display device 6 to display an effect image for notifying that the first new song announcement effect for the next new song B will be performed one week later. Done.

  In this way, in the sub liquid crystal display device 6, various notification effects relating to the new song announcement effect are executed.

  FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the flow of a new song announcement effect performed in the pachinko machine 1 after all new songs have been announced. As shown in FIG. 8D, when the first new song announcement effect of the twelfth song L is performed, the new song announcement effect will be performed every hour from 9/29 Saturday, one week after that date. The types of new songs to be announced change sequentially (see FIG. 10). Then, as illustrated in FIGS. 10A to 10D, the new song announcement effect of the new song A is performed on Saturday, 9/29 when one hour has passed since the power is turned on. On 1 / 30th, when 1 hour has passed since the power was turned on, a new song announcement effect for new song B was performed. On 1/10 Monday, when 1 hour had passed since the power was turned on, a new song announcement effect for new song C was performed. As such, even during the same time period, the type of new song to be announced changes from day to day.

  For this reason, from the first new song announcement production of the new song A to the completion of the new song announcement production of the new song L for one week, the new song announcement production of all the songs that could not be enjoyed without playing every week in one day I can enjoy it.

  In addition, since the types of new songs announced by the day change even in the same time zone, even players who can play only during a certain time zone can enjoy new song announcement effects of various types of new songs. .

  Hereinafter, the internal configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the processing performed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 for realizing the execution of the normal effect, the announcement announcement effect, the new song announcement effect, and the notification effect as described above will be described in detail.

[Configuration of control device of pachinko gaming machine 1]
On the back side of the game board 2, a control device for controlling the operation of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is provided in addition to a ball tank for storing game balls to be paid out as prize balls. As illustrated in FIG. 11, the control device of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is based on a game control board 100 that controls execution of determination, command transmission processing to the effect control board 130, and the command received from the game control board 100. An effect control board 130 that controls the production in an integrated manner, an image sound control board 140 that controls the production of images and sounds, a lamp control board 150 that controls the production of various lamps and logo accessories 7, and the like. . In the present embodiment, the game control board 100 functions as a game control unit that controls the progress of the game, and the effect control board 130, the image sound control board 140, and the lamp control board 150 function as an effect control unit that controls the effect. .

[Configuration of Game Control Board 100]
The game control board 100 includes a main CPU 101, a main ROM 102, and a main RAM 103. The main CPU 101 performs various arithmetic processes related to determination and the number of payout balls based on a program stored in the main ROM 102. The main RAM 103 is used as a storage area for temporarily storing various data used when the main CPU 101 executes the program, or a work area for data processing.

  The game control board 100 includes a first start port switch 111, a second start port switch 112, an electric tulip opening / closing unit 113, a gate switch 114, a big winning port switch 115, a big winning port control unit 116, a normal winning port switch 117, The specific prize opening switch 118, the specific area opening / closing part 119, the V prize opening switch 120, the lose prize opening switch 121, the V prize opening opening / closing part 122, and the respective indicators 41 to 43, 45 to 47 constituting the display 4 are connected. Has been.

  The first start port switch 111 detects that a game ball has won the first start port 11 and outputs a detection signal to the game control board 100. The second start port switch 112 detects that a game ball has won the second start port 12 and outputs a detection signal to the game control board 100. The electric tulip opening / closing part 113 opens and closes the second start port 12 by operating an electric solenoid coupled to the pair of blade members of the electric tulip 17 so as to be able to transmit driving in response to a control signal from the game control board 100. To do. The gate switch 114 detects that the game ball has passed through the gate 16 and outputs the detection signal to the game control board 100. The big prize opening switch 115 detects that a game ball has won the big prize opening 13 and outputs a detection signal to the game control board 100. In response to a control signal from the game control board 100, the special prize opening control unit 116 opens and closes the special prize opening 13 by operating an electric solenoid coupled to a plate that closes the special prize opening 13 so as to be able to transmit the drive. To do. The normal winning port switch 117 detects that the game ball has won the normal winning port 14, and outputs a detection signal to the game control board 100.

  The specific winning opening switch 118 detects that the game ball has won the specific winning opening 19 and outputs a detection signal to the game control board 100. The specific area opening / closing unit 119 opens and closes the specific winning opening 19 by operating an electric solenoid coupled to the blade member 90 so as to be able to transmit driving in response to a control signal from the game control board 100. The V winning opening switch 120 detects that a game ball has won the V winning opening 92 and outputs a detection signal to the game control board 100. The lose prize winning switch 121 detects that the game ball has won the lose prize winning opening 93 and outputs a detection signal to the game control board 100. The V winning opening / closing unit 122 opens and closes the V winning opening 92 by operating an electric solenoid coupled to the slide member 94 so as to be able to transmit driving.

  The main CPU 101 of the game control board 100 detects from the first starting port switch 111, the second starting port switch 112, the big winning port switch 115, the normal winning port switch 117, the V winning port switch 120, or the lose prize port switch 121. When the signal is input, the payout control board (not shown) is instructed to pay out a predetermined number of prize balls according to the place where the game ball has won, and based on the information from the payout control board, Manage the number.

  This payout control board is configured to have a drive motor or the like that sends out a prize ball from a ball tank provided on the back side of the game board 2 to the tray 28.

  The main CPU 101 acquires various random numbers as acquisition information at the timing when the detection signal from the first start port switch 111 is input, and executes the first special symbol determination using the acquired random numbers. Further, the main CPU 101 acquires various random numbers as acquisition information at the timing when the detection signal from the second start port switch 112 is input, and executes the second special symbol determination using the acquired random numbers. If it is determined that the winning game is a big win, the special winning opening 13 is opened and closed via the special winning opening control unit 116.

  When the main CPU 101 determines that the result of the second special symbol determination is a small hit, the main CPU 101 opens and closes the specific winning opening 19 by operating the blade member 90 via the specific area opening / closing unit 119, The V winning opening 92 is opened and closed by operating the slide member 94 via the V winning opening opening / closing section 122. When the game ball wins the V winning opening 92 during the operation of the slide member 94, the big winning opening 13 is opened and closed via the big winning opening control section 116, as in the case where it is determined that the game is a big win.

  Further, the main CPU 101 acquires a random number at the timing when the detection signal from the gate switch 114 is input, and executes normal symbol determination using the acquired random number. And when it determines with opening the 2nd starting port 12, the 2nd starting port 12 is opened temporarily by operating the electric tulip 17 via the electric tulip opening / closing part 113.

  Further, the main CPU 101 causes the respective display devices 41 to 43 and 45 to 47 constituting the display device 4 to execute the processing described above with reference to FIG.

[Configuration of Production Control Board 130]
The effect control board 130 includes a sub CPU 131, a sub ROM 132, a sub RAM 133, and an RTC (real time clock) 134. The sub CPU 131 performs a calculation process when controlling the presentation based on the program stored in the sub ROM 132. The sub RAM 133 is used as a storage area for temporarily storing various data used when the sub CPU 131 executes the program, or a work area for data processing.

  The RTC 134 measures the current date and time (date and time). The pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated when power is supplied from the island power supply device 500 to the power supply board included in the pachinko gaming machine 1. When power is supplied from the island power supply device 500 to the power supply board, the RTC 134 performs a time measuring operation using the power supplied from the power supply board. On the other hand, when power is not supplied from the island power supply device 500 to the power supply board, the RTC 134 performs a timekeeping operation with power supplied from a built-in battery (not shown) built in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For this reason, the RTC 134 can perform a timing operation even when power is not supplied from the power supply board. The built-in battery has a lifespan of about 3 years. However, when power is supplied to the power supply board, the time keeping operation is performed by the power supplied from the power supply board without using the built-in battery. It is possible to extend the life beyond about 3 years. Further, since the timekeeping operation of the RTC 134 is more stable when power is supplied from the power supply board, an effect that the error in the timekeeping operation is reduced can be expected.

  As will be described in detail later, the overall CPU 141 (see FIG. 12) of the image sound control board 140 obtains information indicating the current date and time (hereinafter referred to as “RTC information”) from the RTC 134 and announces the above-described announcement. Controls production and new song announcement production.

  The sub CPU 131 of the effect control board 130 sets the effect contents of the normal effect based on the game information related to the special symbol determination, the normal symbol determination, the special game, etc. transmitted from the game control board 100. In that case, the input of the operation information from the production | presentation button 26 or the production | presentation key 27 may be received, and the production | generation content according to the operation information may be set. Further, the sub CPU 131 transmits a command for instructing execution of the effect of the set effect content to the image sound control board 140 and the lamp control board 150. In the present embodiment, the setting of the content of the announcement announcement effect and the new song announcement effect described above is performed not on the effect control board 130 but on the image sound control board 140.

[Configuration of Lamp Control Board 150]
Although not shown in the drawing, the lamp control board 150 includes a CPU, a ROM, and a RAM. The CPU of the lamp control board 150 performs arithmetic processing when controlling the operation of the frame lamp 25 and the logo accessory 7 based on a program stored in the ROM. The RAM of the lamp control board 150 is used as a storage area for temporarily storing various data used when the CPU executes the program or a work area for data processing.

  The ROM of the lamp control board 150 stores light emission pattern data and operation pattern data. Here, the light emission pattern data is data indicating the light emission patterns of the light emitting elements included in the frame lamp 25 and the logo accessory 7. The operation pattern data is data indicating an operation pattern of the logo accessory 7.

  The CPU of the lamp control board 150 reads the light emission pattern data corresponding to the command received from the effect control board 130 from the light emission pattern data stored in the ROM, and emits light from the frame lamp 25 and the logo accessory 7. Controls the light emission of the device. The CPU of the lamp control board 150 reads out the operation pattern data corresponding to the command received from the effect control board 130 from the operation pattern data stored in the ROM, and operates the logo accessory 7. Control the drive.

[Configuration of Image Sound Control Board 140]
FIG. 12 is a block diagram illustrating a configuration example of the image sound control board 140. The image sound control board 140 performs image display control of the main liquid crystal display device 5 and the sub liquid crystal display device 6 and audio output control from the speaker 24. The image sound control board 140 includes a general CPU 141, a VDP (Video Display Processor) 142, an sound DSP (Digital Signal Processor) 143, a control ROM 144, a control RAM 145, a sound ROM 146, an SDRAM 147, and a VRAM 149.

  The overall CPU 141 stores the image data stored in the CGROM 148 with respect to the VDP 142 based on the programs and various tables stored in the control ROM 144, the commands received from the effect control board 130, and the RTC information acquired from the RTC 134. An instruction to display on the main liquid crystal display device 5 or the sub liquid crystal display device 6 is given. This instruction is mainly performed by outputting a display list.

  Here, the display list is composed of commands for instructing execution of drawing in frame units. The type of image to be drawn, the position (coordinates) to draw the image, display priority, display magnification, and rotation. It includes various parameters such as angle and transmittance. The processing for creating this display list will be described in detail later.

  The overall CPU 141 instructs the sound DSP 143 to output the sound data stored in the sound ROM 146 from the speaker 24.

  The control ROM 144 is configured by a mask ROM, and stores a control program for the overall CPU 141, a display list generation program for generating a display list, various tables (see FIG. 37), and the like.

  The control RAM 145 is used as a storage area for temporarily storing various data used when the general CPU 141 executes the program, or a work area for data processing.

  The CGROM 148 stores effect data necessary for executing a normal effect, an announcement notice effect, a new song announcement effect, a notice effect, and the like. The CGROM 148 includes a flash memory, an EEPROM, an EPROM, a mask ROM, and the like, and includes sprite data (one piece of image data) including a collection of pixel information in a predetermined range of pixels (for example, 32 × 32 pixels), and a plurality of pieces of image data. Compressed and stored movie data consisting of a collection of The pixel information is composed of color number information for specifying a color number for each pixel and an α value indicating the transparency of the image. Further, the CGROM 148 stores, without compressing, palette data or the like in which color number information for specifying a color number and display color information for actually displaying colors are associated with each other.

  In this CGROM 148, new song announcement effect movie data and announcement announcement effect movie data are individually stored for each new song as data for performing the new song announcement effect and the announcement notice effect.

  The VDP 142 specifies which new song announcement announcement effect and execution of the new song announcement effect are instructed based on the display list created by the general CPU 141, and the movie data for the announcement announcement effect movie and the new song announcement effect movie of the specified new song. Data is read from the CGROM 148 and reproduced.

  Further, the CGROM 148 stores normal effect data and specific effect data as sprite data used for generating a normal effect image. The normal effect data is default data that can be used regardless of whether or not a new song announcement effect has been performed, and image data of the first default background image and the second default background image corresponds to this. On the other hand, the specific effect data is sprite data (for example, image data of the new song A background image and the new song B background image) that can be used only when the first new song announcement effect is performed. It is memorized individually. The specific effect data is generated in advance by editing the image data constituting the new song announcement effect movie data.

  In this embodiment, in order to increase the appearance rate of the normal effect using the specific effect data that can be newly used as much as possible, the normal effect using the normal effect data every time the usable specific effect data increases. The display list creation table is switched every time a new song is presented for the first time, so that the appearance rate of normal performance using normal performance data will eventually become zero. Selection is performed. This special selection will be described in detail later.

  The VDP 142 reads normal effect data or specific effect data from the CGROM 148 based on the display list created by the overall CPU 141, and executes a drawing process for performing the normal effect. When the first new song announcement effect has never been performed, the specific effect data is not read out, so that the rendering process using the normal effect data is performed. For example, a default background image is displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 5. Is displayed. On the other hand, for example, when the first new song announcement effect of the new song A is performed, the specific effect data for the new song A is read, and the drawing process using the specific effect data is performed, for example, the background of the new song A An image is displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 5. As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the use restriction of the specific effect data of the new song is released when the first new song announcement effect of the new song is executed.

  Note that only a part of the image data stored in the CGROM 148 may be compressed. As a method for compressing movie data, various known compression methods such as MPEG4 can be used.

  The VRAM 149 is configured by an SRAM capable of writing and reading image data at high speed, and includes a display list storage area 1491, a development storage area 1492, a full screen frame buffer 1493, a reduced image frame buffer 1494, a main liquid crystal display. And a sub liquid crystal frame buffer 1496.

  The display list storage area 1491 temporarily stores the display list output from the overall CPU 141. The expanded storage area 1492 stores image data that has been read from the CGROM 148 and expanded. The full screen frame buffer 1493 is a drawing frame buffer for drawing an image displayed in the entire area. The reduced image frame buffer 1494 is a drawing frame buffer for drawing a normal effect image (see FIG. 7) to be reduced and displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 5. The main liquid crystal frame buffer 1495 is a display frame buffer that temporarily stores image data transferred from the full-screen frame buffer 1493 (and the reduced image frame buffer 1494). The sub liquid crystal frame buffer 1496 is a frame buffer used for both drawing and display for drawing and displaying the image data displayed on the sub liquid crystal display device 6.

  The VDP 142 decompresses the image data stored in a compressed state in the CGROM 148 and stores the decompressed image data in the expanded storage area 1492. Also, the VDP 142 performs drawing processing using the full screen frame buffer 1493, the reduced image frame buffer 1494, or the sub liquid crystal frame buffer 1496 based on the display list stored in the display list storage area 1491. The VDP 142 generates an RGB signal as a video signal indicating the color of the image from the image data stored in the display frame buffer (main liquid crystal frame buffer 1495 or sub liquid crystal frame buffer 1496) in the VRAM 149. The processed RGB signals are output to the main liquid crystal display device 5 or the sub liquid crystal display device 6.

  Connected to the acoustic DSP 143 are an acoustic ROM 146 for storing various acoustic data relating to music, voice, sound effects, etc., and an SDRAM 147 used as a work area for data processing by the acoustic DSP 143. The acoustic DSP 143 reads the acoustic data corresponding to the instruction from the overall CPU 141 from the acoustic ROM 146 to the SDRAM 147, executes data processing, and outputs the acoustic data after the data processing to the speaker 24.

[Drawing process of VDP 142]
Next, a drawing process executed by the VDP 142 and an image displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 5 or the sub liquid crystal display device 6 will be described with reference to FIGS.

  FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a normal drawing process. When the announcement announcement effect and the new song announcement effect described above are not performed, the following drawing process is executed by the VDP 142 in units of frames based on the display list for the main liquid crystal stored in the display list storage area 1491. That is, as illustrated in FIG. 13, the VDP 142 includes, for example, a first image indicating a decorative symbol and a character, a second image as a background image indicating a background such as a decorative symbol, and a third image as a character image. Are read from the CGROM 148, stored in the expanded storage area 1492, and a normal effect image obtained by synthesizing these images using the Z buffer method or the like is drawn in the full screen frame buffer 1493.

  Note that the reduced image frame buffer 1494 is a frame buffer that is used only when it is necessary to reduce and display the normal effect image under a specific condition during the announcement announcement effect or the new song announcement effect. Or it is not used when a new song announcement effect is not performed.

  For this reason, in the normal time when the announcement announcement effect or the new song announcement effect is not performed, the VDP 142 transfers the normal effect image drawn in the full screen frame buffer 1493 to the main liquid crystal frame buffer 1495, and at a predetermined display timing. The RGB signal is output to the main liquid crystal display device 5. Then, while the image in the main liquid crystal frame buffer 1495 is being output to the main liquid crystal display device 5, the normal effect image of the next frame is drawn in the full screen frame buffer 1493.

  Also, the VDP 142 reads out a notification effect image related to the new song announcement effect from the CGROM 148 based on the display list for the sub liquid crystal stored in the display list storage area 1491, and stores it in the expanded storage area 1492. The character image indicating the number of days remaining until the first new song announcement effect is executed and the remaining time until the new song announcement effect is started is synthesized and drawn in the sub-liquid crystal frame buffer 1496 using the Z buffer method or the like. . Then, the combined effect rendering effect image is output to the sub liquid crystal display device 6 as an RGB signal at a predetermined display timing.

  In order to efficiently execute the drawing process, image data frequently used in the drawing process may be buffered in the expanded storage area 1492.

  FIG. 14 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the drawing process during the announcement announcement effect or the new song announcement effect. When the above-described announcement announcement effect or new song announcement effect is performed, the following drawing process is executed by the VDP 142 in units of frames based on the display list for the main liquid crystal stored in the display list storage area 1491. That is, as shown in FIG. 14, the VDP 142 displays, for example, a pre-rendered special effect image (announcement notice effect image or new song announcement effect image) and a dot effect image for displaying a normal effect image in dots. Are stored in the expanded storage area 1492, and these images are drawn together in the full-screen frame buffer 1493. At that time, the special effect image is drawn in the area corresponding to the upper area, and the dot effect image is drawn in the area corresponding to the lower area.

  Note that when the normal effect by the dot effect image is performed, it is not necessary to reduce the normal effect image displayed on the full screen, and therefore the reduced image frame buffer 1494 is not used here.

  For this reason, when the announcement announcement effect or the new song announcement effect is being performed, the VDP 142 transfers the special effect image and the dot effect image drawn in the full-screen frame buffer 1493 to the main liquid crystal frame buffer 1495 for a predetermined display. The RGB signal is output to the main liquid crystal display device 5 at the timing. Then, while the image in the main liquid crystal frame buffer 1495 is being output to the main liquid crystal display device 5, the special effect image and the dot effect image of the next frame are drawn in the full screen frame buffer 1493.

  Further, the VDPU 142 draws the notification effect image in the sub liquid crystal frame buffer 1496 and outputs it to the sub liquid crystal display device 6 in the same manner as when the announcement announcement effect and the new song announcement effect are not performed. In addition, when the new song announcement effect is being performed using the main liquid crystal display device 5, the process of counting down the remaining time until the new song announcement effect is started is not necessarily required, so instead of the notification effect image, You may make it perform the drawing process for displaying the effect image regarding the new song announcement effect currently performed in the main liquid crystal display device 5 on the sub liquid crystal display device 6. FIG.

  Next, a drawing process when a normal effect image is reduced and displayed will be described. If a special effect with a long special time such as 2 minutes is performed and the normal effect continues even after the start of the new song presentation effect, the normal effect will be displayed before the special symbol change display ends. If the image is switched to dot display, the interest of the normal effect image is impaired. Therefore, in order to prevent such a problem from occurring, it is conceivable that the full-screen display of the normal effect image is continued until the change display of the special symbol is finished. Another problem will be delayed. Therefore, in the present embodiment, in order to prevent the occurrence of these problems, for example, the normal effect image is reduced and superimposed on the new song announcement effect image at the timing when the new song announcement effect is started, and a special symbol variation display is performed. Is completed, the normal effect using the dot effect image is started. Such control is performed in the same manner when, for example, it becomes a big hit during the execution of the announcement announcement effect or the new song announcement effect and it is necessary to make a notification regarding the start of the special game (see, for example, FIG. 7).

  FIG. 15 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a drawing process when a normal effect image is reduced and displayed. When the normal effect image is reduced and displayed during the above-described announcement announcement effect or new song announcement effect, the following drawing process is performed by the VDP 142 based on the display list for the main liquid crystal stored in the display list storage area 1491. It is executed in units of frames. That is, as shown in FIG. 15, the VDP 142 draws the new song announcement effect image (or announcement announcement effect image) and the dot effect image together in the full-screen frame buffer 1493 as described above. Further, the VDP 142 draws a reduced image obtained by scaling the normal effect image including the first image, the second image, and the third image in the reduced image frame buffer 1494.

  In the present embodiment, when the normal effect image is reduced and displayed, the same decorative design as that included in the normal effect image is displayed in dots in the lower area. For this reason, the dot effect image is drawn in the area corresponding to the lower area in the full-screen frame buffer 1493 so that the same decorative design as the decorative design included in the reduced normal display image is displayed in dots. The

  Next, the VDP 142 transfers the new song effect image and the dot effect image drawn in the full-screen frame buffer 1493 to the main liquid crystal frame buffer 1495, and also reduces the reduced image drawn in the reduced image frame buffer 1494 to the main liquid crystal frame. Transfer to buffer 1495. The VDP 142 outputs the two images thus stored in the main liquid crystal frame buffer 1495 to the main liquid crystal display device 5 together as RGB signals at a predetermined display timing. In addition, a notice effect image or an effect image related to the new song announcement effect is drawn in the sub liquid crystal frame buffer 1496 and output to the sub liquid crystal display device 6.

  Then, when the normal effect by the reduced normal effect image ends, the drawing process illustrated in FIG. 15 is switched to the drawing process illustrated in FIG. 14, and the normal effect using only the lower region is started. Become.

  Note that a frame buffer similar to the sub liquid crystal frame buffer 1496 may be provided separately, and alternately switched between the drawing frame buffer and the display frame buffer.

  In the present embodiment, the case where the VDP 142 performs drawing processing of two effect images displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 5 and the sub liquid crystal display device 6 will be described. However, the VDP and the sub liquid crystal for the main liquid crystal display device 5 are described. A VDP for the display device 6 may be provided separately.

  In this embodiment, the case where the main liquid crystal display list and the sub liquid crystal display list are stored in the display list storage area 1491 will be described. However, in order to store these display lists individually, the display list storage is performed. Two regions may be provided.

[Timer interrupt processing by game control board 100]
Next, a timer interrupt process executed in the game control board 100 will be described with reference to FIG. Here, FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing an example of timer interrupt processing executed in the game control board 100. The game control board 100 repeatedly executes a series of processes illustrated in FIG. 16 at regular time intervals (for example, 4 milliseconds) during normal operation except for special cases such as when the power is turned on and when the power is turned off. . Note that the processing of the game control board 100 described based on the flowcharts of FIG. 16 and subsequent figures is performed according to a command issued by the main CPU 101 based on a program stored in the main ROM 102.

  First, the main CPU 101 executes random number update processing for updating various random numbers such as a jackpot random number, a jackpot symbol random number, a jackpot symbol random number, a reach random number, a variation pattern random number, and a normal symbol random number (step S1).

  Here, the jackpot random number is a random number for determining the jackpot, the jackpot, or the loss. The jackpot design random number is a random number for determining the type of jackpot when it is determined that the jackpot is a jackpot. The small hitting design random number is a random number for determining the type of two types of big hits generated when a game ball wins the V winning opening 92 during the small hitting game. The reach random number is a random number for determining whether to perform an effect with reach or an effect without reach when it is determined that the reach is lost. The variation pattern random number is a random number for determining a variation pattern when a special symbol is displayed in a variable manner. The normal symbol random number is a random number for determining whether or not to open the second start port 12. The jackpot random number, the jackpot symbol random number, the jackpot symbol random number, the reach random number, the variation pattern random number, and the normal symbol random number are incremented by “1” every time the process of step S1 is performed. Note that a loop counter is used as a counter for performing the processing of step S1, and each random number returns to “0” after reaching a preset maximum value.

  Subsequent to the process of step S1, the main CPU 101 executes a switch process when a detection signal is input from each switch (step S2). This switch process will be described in detail later with reference to FIGS.

  Following the processing of step S2, the main CPU 101 executes special symbol determination, displays the special symbol on the first special symbol display 41 or the second special symbol display 42, and shows the result of the special symbol determination. A special symbol process including a process of stopping and displaying the determination symbol is executed (step S3). This special symbol process will be described later in detail with reference to FIG.

  Subsequent to the process of step S3, the main CPU 101 includes a process of executing normal symbol determination, causing the normal symbol display unit 45 to display the normal symbol in a variable manner, and then stopping and displaying the normal symbol indicating the result of the normal symbol determination. Normal symbol processing is executed (step S4). This normal symbol processing will be described in detail later based on FIG.

  Following the process of step S4, the main CPU 101 performs the electric tulip process for operating the electric tulip 17 via the electric tulip opening / closing part 113 when it is determined that the second start port 12 is opened as a result of the normal symbol determination. Is executed (step S5). This electric tulip process will be described in detail later based on FIG.

  Following the process of step S5, the main CPU 101 activates the blade member 90 via the specific area opening / closing part 119 and determines the V prize opening opening / closing part when it is determined that the small symbol is won in the special symbol process of step S3. A specific area opening control process for operating the slide member 94 via 122 is executed (step S6). The specific area release control process will be described later in detail with reference to FIGS. 26 and 27.

  Subsequent to the processing in step S6, the main CPU 101 controls the big winning opening control unit 116 when it is determined that the big winning is made in step S3, or when a game ball wins the V winning opening 92 during the small winning game. Then, a special winning opening opening control process for opening the special winning opening 13 is executed (step S7). The special winning opening opening control process will be described later in detail with reference to FIGS.

  Subsequent to the process of step S7, the main CPU 101 executes a prize ball process for controlling the payout of the prize ball according to the winning of the game ball (step S8).

  Subsequent to the process of step S8, the main CPU 101 transmits to the effect control board 130 information necessary to determine various commands and effect contents set (stored) in the main RAM 103 in the process step before step S8. Processing is executed (step S9). By executing the process of step S9, game information relating to special symbol determination and special games is transmitted to the effect control board 130. Specifically, the game information includes a change start command, a symbol determination command, an opening command, a round start command, an ending command, and the like, which will be described later.

[Switch processing by game control board 100]
FIG. 17 is a detailed flowchart of the switch process in step S2 of FIG. Subsequent to the process of step S1, the main CPU 101 monitors the presence or absence of a detection signal input from the first start port switch 111 as illustrated in FIG. 17, and is updated as appropriate by the process of step S1. For the random numbers (big hit random number, big hit design random number, reach random number, and variation pattern random number), a first start port switch process is performed to acquire a value at the time when the detection signal from the first start port switch 111 is input ( Step S21). The first start port switch process will be described in detail later based on FIG.

  Next, the main CPU 101 monitors the presence or absence of a detection signal input from the second start port switch 112, and various random numbers (big hit random number, big hit symbol random number, small bonus symbol updated as appropriate by the process of step S1. For the random number, the reach random number, and the fluctuation pattern random number), a second start port switch process is performed to acquire a value at the time when the detection signal from the second start port switch 112 is input (step S22). The second start port switch process will be described in detail later based on FIG.

  Then, the main CPU 101 monitors whether or not a detection signal is input from the gate switch 114, and the value at the time when the detection signal from the gate switch 114 is input with respect to the normal symbol random number that is appropriately updated by the process of step S1. The gate switch process for acquiring the above is executed (step S23). This gate switch processing will be described in detail later based on FIG.

[First Start Port Switch Processing by Game Control Board 100]
FIG. 18 is a detailed flowchart of the first start port switch process in step S21 of FIG. As illustrated in FIG. 18, following the random number update process in step S <b> 1, the main CPU 101 indicates a detection signal from the first start port switch 111 (indicating that the first start port switch 111 is “ON”). Based on whether or not an ON signal is input, it is determined whether or not the first start port switch 111 is turned “ON” (step S211). Here, when it is determined that the first start port switch 111 has been turned “ON” (step S211: YES), the number U1 of the first special symbol determination stored in the main RAM 103 is stored in the main ROM 102 in advance. It is determined whether it is less than the maximum reserved number Umax1 (in the present embodiment, “4”) of the first special symbol determination (step S212).

  When the main CPU 101 determines that the hold number U1 is less than the maximum hold number Umax1 (step S212: YES), the main CPU 101 updates the value of the hold number U1 to a value obtained by adding “1” (step S213). Then, as the acquisition information used for the first special symbol determination, a jackpot random number, a jackpot symbol random number, a reach random number, and a variation pattern random number are acquired, and these random numbers are correlated and stored in a predetermined area of the main RAM 103 (step S214 to S217), a hold command for notifying the image sound control board 140 that the first special symbol determination is held is set in the main RAM 103 (step S218).

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment is configured such that the result of the first special symbol determination is either a big hit or a loss, and the first special symbol determination is not determined to be a small hit that generates a small hit game. Has been. For this reason, the first start port switch process does not include a step of acquiring a small hitting design random number for determining the type of the two big hits.

[Second Start Port Switch Processing by Game Control Board 100]
FIG. 19 is a detailed flowchart of the second start port switch process in step S22 of FIG. As illustrated in FIG. 19, the main CPU 101 detects the detection signal from the second start port switch 112 (the second start port switch 112 is turned “ON” subsequent to the first start port switch process in step S <b> 21. On the basis of whether or not an ON signal indicating that the second start port switch 112 has been turned ON is determined (step S221).

  If the main CPU 101 determines that the second start port switch 112 is “ON” (step S221: YES), for example, a long hit game flag, a short hit game flag, or a small hit game stored in the main RAM 103. Based on whether or not the flag is set to “ON”, it is determined whether or not a special game is being played (step S222).

  Here, the long win game flag is a flag indicating whether or not a long win game consisting of a plurality of long open round games that open the big winning opening 13 is long, and is set to “ON” at the start of the long win game. Is set to “OFF” at the end of the long hit game. The short win game flag is a flag indicating whether or not a short win game consisting of a plurality of short open round games that open the big winning opening 13 is short, and is set to “ON” at the start of the short win game. And set to “OFF” at the end of the short hit game. The small hit game flag is a flag indicating whether or not a small hit game for opening the specific winning opening 19 is being executed, and is set to “ON” at the start of the small hit game, and “ OFF "is set.

  When determining that the special game is not being played (step S222: NO), the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the special symbol display on the first special symbol display 41 or the second special symbol display 42 is being displayed. (Step S223). Here, when it is determined that the special symbol variation display is not being performed (step S223: NO), as the acquisition information used for the second special symbol determination, the jackpot random number, the jackpot symbol random number, the jackpot symbol random number, the reach random number And the variation pattern random numbers are acquired, and these random numbers are associated with each other and stored in a predetermined area of the main RAM 103 (steps S224 to S228).

  As described above, when the game ball wins the second starting port 12 when the special game is not being displayed and the special symbol is not being displayed, the main CPU 101 stores various random numbers used for the second special symbol determination in the main game. The data is directly stored in the determination storage area of the RAM 103. This determination storage area is a storage area for storing various random numbers used for the special symbol determination when the special symbol determination is actually executed. When a game ball is won at the first starting port 11, the main CPU 101 stores various random numbers used for the first special symbol determination in the reserved storage area of the main RAM 103, and actually performs the first special symbol determination. When the change display of the special symbol is started, various random numbers stored in the reserved storage area are shifted to the determination storage area.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, since the game ball has won the second starting port 12 during the special symbol change display or during the special game, the special symbol change related to the second special symbol determination corresponding to the winning is made. When the display cannot be started immediately, the second special symbol determination based on the winning of the game ball to the second start port 12 is not performed. On the other hand, when a game ball wins at the first start port 11, even if the variable symbol display related to the first special symbol determination corresponding to the winning cannot be started immediately, the right of the first special symbol determination is 4 is the upper limit.

[Gate switch processing by game control board 100]
FIG. 20 is a detailed flowchart of the gate switch process in step S23 of FIG. As illustrated in FIG. 20, the main CPU 101 detects the detection signal from the gate switch 114 (ON signal indicating that the gate switch 114 is “ON”) following the second start-up port switch process in step S <b> 22. It is determined whether or not the gate switch 114 is turned “ON” based on whether or not is input (step S231).

  When the main CPU 101 determines that the gate switch 114 has been turned “ON” (step S231: YES), the normal symbol determination suspension number T stored in the main RAM 103 is stored in the main ROM 102 in advance. It is determined whether or not the determination is less than the maximum hold number Tmax (for example, “4”) (step S232).

  When the main CPU 101 determines that the hold number T is less than the maximum hold number Tmax (step S232: YES), the main CPU 101 updates the hold number T to a value obtained by adding “1” (step S233), and is held by this process. A normal symbol random number used for normal symbol determination is acquired and stored in the main RAM 103 (step S234).

[Special symbol processing by game control board 100]
Next, the details of the special symbol process executed by the game control board 100 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 21 is a detailed flowchart of the special symbol process in step S3 of FIG. As illustrated in FIG. 21, the main CPU 101 of the game control board 100 determines whether the long hit game flag, the short hit game flag, or the small hit game flag stored in the main RAM 103 is set to “ON”. Whether or not a special game is in progress is determined based on the determination (step S301). Here, when it is determined that the special game is being played (step S301: YES), the process proceeds to the normal symbol process of step S4.

  When the main CPU 101 determines that the special game is not being played (step S301: NO), the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the special symbol is being changed (step S302). Here, when it is determined that the special symbol variation display is not being performed (step S302: NO), it is determined whether or not various random numbers related to the second start opening winning are stored in the determination storage area of the main RAM 103 ( Step S303). Specifically, various random numbers acquired in response to the game ball winning the second start opening 12 are directly stored in the determination storage area, and various random numbers related to the second start opening winning are stored. Is stored in the determination storage area. Based on whether or not this flag is stored when various random numbers are stored in the determination storage area, various types of information stored in the determination storage area are stored. It is determined whether the random number is related to the second start opening winning or the first starting opening winning. Here, when it is determined that the random number related to the second start opening winning is stored (step S303: YES), the process proceeds to step S307 described later.

  When the main CPU 101 determines that the random number related to the second start opening winning is not stored in the determination storage area (step S303: NO), the main CPU 101 stores the first special symbol determination hold number U1 stored in the main RAM 103. It is determined whether or not “1” or more (step S304). Here, when it is determined that the hold count U1 is “1” or more (step S304: YES), the hold count U1 is updated to a value obtained by subtracting “1” (step S305). Then, a shift process for the storage area of the main RAM 103 is executed (step S306). Specifically, the jackpot random numbers, jackpot symbol random numbers, reach random numbers, and variable pattern random numbers related to the first special symbol determination stored in the reserved storage area of the main RAM 103 are first stored in the reserved storage area. (The oldest) is shifted to the determination storage area, and the remaining one is shifted to the determination storage area.

  When the main CPU 101 executes the process of step S306 or determines that the random number related to the second start opening winning is stored in the determination storage area (step S303: YES), it is stored in the determination storage area. The jackpot determination process is executed based on the random number that is stored (step S307). By executing this jackpot determination process, it is determined whether it is a big hit, a small hit, or a loss, and setting information of a determination symbol indicating the determination result is set in the main RAM 103. When it is determined that the game is a big hit (1 type big win), the type of the big win is determined, and when it is determined that the jackpot is a game, the game ball wins the V winning opening 92 during the small hit game. The kind of two types of jackpots that will be triggered by this is determined. The jackpot determination process will be described in detail later based on FIG.

  Following the process of step S307, the main CPU 101 executes a variation pattern selection process (step S308). Specifically, referring to the variation pattern table stored in advance in the main ROM 102, the determination result of the jackpot determination in step S307, the type of determination symbol set in the main RAM 103, the current gaming state, the first special symbol A variation pattern of the special symbol is selected based on the reach random number and variation pattern random number stored in the determination storage area together with the determination pending number U1 and the jackpot random number used in the processing of step S307. By performing the processing in step S308, it is also determined whether to perform an effect with reach or an effect without reach.

  Following the processing of step S308, the main CPU 101 determines whether the symbol setting information set in step S307, the symbol setting information relates to the first special symbol determination, or the second special symbol determination. Information indicating whether or not, a variation pattern setting information set in the process of step S308, information indicating which of the effects with reach or effects without reach, information regarding the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1, etc. A change start command is set in the main RAM 103 (step S309). This variation start command is a command for instructing the start of the variation effect accompanying the variation display of the special symbol, and is transmitted to the effect control board 130 by the transmission process of step S9.

  On the other hand, the effect control board 130 needs to specify the result of the special symbol determination by analyzing the variation start command received from the game control board 100, and perform either the effect with reach or the effect without reach. To determine the game state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 by acquiring the variation time during which the special symbol is variably displayed. Then, in accordance with the special symbol variation display on the first special symbol display 41 or the second special symbol display 42, what kind of effect image is displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 5, what kind of sound is output from the speaker 24. Is output, the light emission pattern of the frame lamp 25 is determined, whether the logo accessory 7 is to be operated, and the effect of the determined content is determined by the image sound control board 140 and the lamp control board 150. To run.

  Subsequent to the processing in step S309, the main CPU 101 starts the special symbol variation display based on the setting information included in the variation start command set in step S309 (step S310). The special symbol variation display is performed when the processing in steps S307 to S309 is performed in a state where the random number related to the first special symbol determination is stored in the determination storage area. 41. When the process of steps S307 to S309 is performed in a state where random numbers relating to the second special symbol determination are stored, the second special symbol display 42 is used.

  Subsequent to step S310, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the customer waiting flag stored in the main RAM 103 is set to “ON” (step S311). Here, the customer waiting flag is a flag indicating whether or not the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in a customer waiting state, the right for the first special symbol determination is not reserved, and the first special symbol determination or the second special symbol is not held. It is set to “ON” at the timing when the special symbol variation display related to symbol determination is not performed, and is set to “OFF” when the special symbol variation display is started again.

  If the main CPU 101 determines that the customer waiting flag is set to “ON” (step S311: YES), the main CPU 101 sets the customer waiting flag to “OFF” (step S312). Then, when the process of step S312 is executed, or when it is determined that the customer waiting flag is not set to “ON” (step S311: NO), measurement of the variation time is started (step S313).

  When the main CPU 101 executes the process of step S313 or determines that the special symbol is changing (step S302: YES), the main CPU 101 is selected by the process of step S308 from the start of the measurement of the changing time in step S313. It is determined whether or not the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern has elapsed (step S315). Here, when it is determined that the variation time has not elapsed (step S315: NO), a series of special symbol processing ends, and the processing proceeds to normal symbol processing in step S4.

  When the main CPU 101 determines that the variation time has elapsed (step S315: YES), the determination symbol indicating the determination result of the special symbol determination is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 41 or the second special symbol display 42. Is set in the main RAM 103 (step S316). This symbol determination command is transmitted to the effect control board 130 by the transmission process in step S9. Thereby, the process etc. which stop-display the decoration symbol which was variably displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 5 in the aspect which shows the determination result of special symbol determination, etc. are performed.

  Subsequent to the process of step S316, the main CPU 101 ends the special symbol variation display started in the process of step S310 (step S317). At that time, the determination symbol (big hit symbol, small bonus symbol, or lost symbol) set in the process of step S307 is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display which has variably displayed the special symbol.

  Subsequent to the process of step S318, the main CPU 101 resets the variation time that started the measurement in the process of step S313 (step S318), starts the first special game if it is a big win, and if it is a small win The stop process including the process of starting the small hit game is executed (step S319). This stop process will be described later in detail with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, if the main CPU 101 determines that the number U1 of the first special symbol determination is not “1” or more (step S304: NO), the main CPU 101 determines whether the customer waiting flag is set to “ON”. (Step S321). If it is determined that the customer waiting flag is set to “ON” (step S321: YES), the process proceeds to the normal symbol process in step S4.

  When the main CPU 101 determines that the customer waiting flag is not set to “ON” (step S321: NO), the main CPU 101 sets a customer waiting command for notifying that the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the customer waiting state in the main RAM 103. (Step S322), the customer waiting flag is set to "ON" (Step S323). This customer waiting command is transmitted to the effect control board 130 by the transmission process of step S9. As a result, when a predetermined time (in this embodiment, 30 seconds) elapses after the customer waiting command is transmitted, the customer waiting effect is started.

[Big hit judgment processing by game control board 100]
FIG. 22 is a detailed flowchart of the jackpot determination process in step S307 of FIG. When the main CPU 101 determines that the random number related to the second special symbol determination is stored together with the flag in the determination storage area (step S303: YES), or when the process of step S306 is executed, it is exemplified in FIG. In this manner, the jackpot determination is executed (step S3071). Here, when executing the jackpot determination relating to the second start opening winning, the jackpot determination table relating to the first starting opening winning is executed with reference to the second starting opening winning jackpot determination table stored in the main ROM 102 in advance. When doing so, the first start opening winning jackpot determination table stored in advance in the main ROM 102 is referred to.

  In the second start opening winning jackpot determination table, a determination result and a random value are stored in association with each other. Specifically, a random value for the big hit, a random value for the small hit, and a random value for the loss are stored. When the main CPU 101 executes the jackpot determination related to the second start opening winning a prize, the jackpot random number stored in the determination storage area matches any random value defined in the second starting opening winning jackpot determination table It is determined whether it is a big hit (one type big hit), a small hit or a loss based on whether or not.

  In the first start opening winning jackpot determination table, a determination result and a random value are stored in association with each other. Specifically, a random value for jackpot and a random value for loss are stored. When the main CPU 101 executes the jackpot determination related to the first start opening winning prize, the jackpot random number stored in the determination storage area matches any random number value defined in the first starting opening winning jackpot determination table It is determined whether it is a big hit (1 type big hit) or lost.

  As described above, the main CPU 101 determines that the various random numbers stored in the determination storage area are satisfied when the start condition is established such that various random numbers related to the first special symbol determination or the second special symbol determination are stored in the determination storage area. Based on the above, it is determined whether or not to perform the first special game.

  Based on the determination result of step S3071, the main CPU 101 determines whether it is a one-type big hit (step S3072). Here, when it is determined that it is one kind of big hit (step S3072: YES), the type of big hit is determined with reference to the symbol determination table at the time of big hit stored in the main ROM 102 (step S3073).

  In the symbol determination table at the time of jackpot, the hit type and the random number value are stored in association with each other. The main CPU 101 determines whether or not the jackpot symbol random number stored in the determination storage area together with the jackpot random number matches a random jackpot value specified in the symbol determination table at the jackpot time. Determine the type. Examples of the type 1 big hit in the first special symbol determination include “per 7R without time reduction”, “per 4R with time reduction”, and “abrupt time reduction”. Examples of the type big hit in the second special symbol determination Examples include “per 4R without time reduction”, “per 15R with time reduction”, and “per 4R with time reduction” (see FIG. 4).

  The main CPU 101 sets the jackpot symbol corresponding to the jackpot type determined in step S3073 as setting information in the main RAM 103 (step S3074). As a result, the jackpot symbol set here in the process of step S317 is stopped and displayed as a determination symbol on the first special symbol display 41 or the second special symbol display 42, and the first special game is executed. Will be.

  On the other hand, if the main CPU 101 determines that the result of the special symbol determination is not one type big hit (step S3072: NO), it is based on whether or not the flag related to the second special symbol determination is stored in the determination storage area. Then, it is determined whether or not this special symbol determination is a first special symbol determination related to the first start opening prize (step S3075). Here, when it is determined that the first special symbol determination is made (step S3075: YES), if the determination result of the first special symbol determination is not a big hit, it is a loss, so the lost symbol is set in the main RAM 103 as setting information. (Step S3076). As a result, the lost symbol set here in the process of step S317 is stopped and displayed as a determination symbol on the first special symbol display 41.

  When the determination result of the second special symbol determination is not a big hit, the determination result is a small hit or a loss. On the other hand, if the main CPU 101 determines that it is not the first special symbol determination (step S3075: NO), that is, if the current special symbol determination is the second special symbol determination, the result of the jackpot determination in step S3071 It is determined whether or not is a small hit (step S3077). Specifically, based on whether or not the jackpot random number stored in the determination storage area matches the random number value corresponding to the jackpot specified in the second start opening winning jackpot determination table. 2 It is determined whether the determination result of the special symbol determination is a small hit or a loss.

  When the main CPU 101 determines that the result of the second special symbol determination is not a small hit (step S3077: NO), the main CPU 101 executes the process of step S3076. In this case, the lost symbol set here in the process of step S317 is stopped and displayed as a determination symbol on the second special symbol display 42.

  On the other hand, if the main CPU 101 determines that the result of the second special symbol determination is a small hit (step S3077: YES), the main CPU 101 refers to the symbol determination table at the time of the small hit stored in the main ROM 102 in advance. Is determined (step S3078). Specifically, the type of the small hit is determined based on which random number value specified in the symbol determination table at the time of the small hit matches the random number for small hit stored in the determination storage area To do. Then, the determined small hit symbol is set in the main RAM 103 as setting information (step S3079). Thereby, the small winning symbol set here at the time of the process of step S317 is stopped and displayed as a determination symbol on the second special symbol indicator 42.

  When the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 42 in this way, the above-described small hit game is started. Then, when a game ball wins the V winning opening 92 during the small hit game, two kinds of big wins are made, and the second special game is performed with the small hit game as the first round. The type of big hit of two types is determined based on the small hit symbol that is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 42. For this reason, the process which determines the kind of small hits can be regarded as the process which determines the kind of two types big hit. Examples of the two types of big hits include “per 15R with time reduction”, “per 4R with time reduction”, and “per 4R without time reduction” (see FIG. 4).

[Processing during stop by game control board 100]
FIG. 23 is a detailed flowchart of the stop process in step S319 of FIG. After resetting the variation time by the process of step S318, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not it is a type 1 big win based on the result of the big hit determination of step S3071 as illustrated in FIG. Step S3191). Here, when it is determined that it is a type 1 big hit (step S3191: YES), it is determined whether the first special game executed for the type 1 big hit is a long hit game or a short hit game ( Step S3192). Specifically, based on the setting information, the jackpot symbol set in the main RAM 103 in the process of step S3074 determines whether a long hit game or a short hit game is performed. In the present embodiment, a short win game is played only when “suddenly a short win”, and a long win game is played for other types of big hits.

  When the main CPU 101 determines that the game is a long game (step S3192: YES), the main CPU 101 sets the long game flag to “ON” (step S3193), and determines that the game is not a long game (step S3193). Step S3192: NO), the short winning game flag is set to “ON” (step S3194).

  Following the process of step S3193 or the process of step S3194, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the short-time game flag stored in the main RAM 103 is set to “ON” (step S3195). The short-time game flag is a flag indicating whether or not the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the short-time game state, and is set to “ON” when the normal game state shifts to the short-time game state. It is set to “OFF” when returning to the normal gaming state from. If it is determined that the short-time game flag is set to “ON” (step S3195: YES), the short-time game flag is set to “OFF” (step S3196).

  On the other hand, if the main CPU 101 determines that it is not a one-type big hit (step S3191: NO), it determines whether or not the time-saving game flag is set to “ON” (step S3197). If it is determined that the short-time game flag is set to “ON” (step S3197: YES), the short-time game remaining number W stored in the main RAM 103 is updated to a value obtained by subtracting “1” (step). S3198). The short game remaining number W indicates the remaining number of times that the second special symbol determination (or the first special symbol determination) is executed in the short time gaming state. When the short game residual number W becomes “0”, the game The state is returned from the short-time gaming state to the normal gaming state.

  Subsequent to step S3198, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the time-saving remaining game count W is “0” (step S3199). Here, when it is determined that the short time remaining game count W is “0” (step S3199: YES), the short time game flag is set to “OFF” (step S3200). As a result, the gaming state is returned from the short-time gaming state to the normal gaming state.

  The main CPU 101 executes the process of step S3200, determines that the time-saving game flag is not “ON” (step S3197: NO), or determines that the time-saving game remaining count W is not “0” ( In step S3199: NO, it is determined whether or not it is a small hit like the processing in step S3077 (step S3201). If it is determined that the game is a small hit (step S3201: YES), the small hit game flag is set to “ON” (step S3202).

  When the main CPU 101 executes the process of step S3196, determines that the time-saving game flag is not set to “ON” (step S3195: NO), or executes the process of step S3202, the main CPU 101 opens to the main RAM 103. A command is set (step S3203). Here, the term “opening” refers to a period from the start of a long win game or a short win game until the first big winning opening 13 is opened, or the first special winning opening 19 is opened after the small winning game is started. It means the period until it starts. On the other hand, the opening command is a command for notifying that the opening is started, and is transmitted to the effect control board 130 by the transmission process in step S9.

[Normal design processing by game control board 100]
FIG. 24 is a detailed flowchart of the normal symbol process in step S4 of FIG. As illustrated in FIG. 24, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the auxiliary game flag stored in the main RAM 103 is set to “ON” following the special symbol process in step S3 (step S401). ). This auxiliary game flag is a flag that indicates whether or not the electric tulip 17 is in an auxiliary game in which the operation of returning to the closed posture after maintaining the open posture for a predetermined time is being performed a predetermined number of times. It is set and set to “OFF” when it is not in an auxiliary game.

  If it is determined in step S401 that the auxiliary game flag is set to “ON” (step S401: YES), the process proceeds to the electric tulip process in step S5.

  When determining that the auxiliary game flag is not set to “ON” (step S401: NO), the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the normal symbol display on the normal symbol display 45 is being displayed (step S402). ), When it is determined that the normal symbol variation display is not being performed (step S402: NO), it is determined whether or not the number T of the normal symbol determination is “1” or more (step S403). Here, when it is determined that the number of holds T is not “1” or more (step S403: NO), the process proceeds to the electric tulip process of step S5.

  When the main CPU 101 determines that the number of holds T is “1” or more (step S403: YES), the main CPU 101 updates the number of holds T to a value obtained by subtracting “1” (step S404), and executes a hit random number determination process. (Step S405). Specifically, the oldest normal symbol random number among the normal symbol random numbers stored in the main RAM 103 by the processing in step S234 (see FIG. 20) is the winning value related to the normal symbol determination stored in the main ROM 102 in advance. It is determined whether or not the determination result of the normal symbol determination is a win based on whether or not it matches any of the above.

  Following the process of step S405, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the determination result of the normal symbol determination is a win based on the determination result of step S405 (step S406). In step S406: YES), a winning symbol to be stopped and displayed as a determination symbol on the normal symbol display 45 is set in the main RAM 103 (step S407). On the contrary, when it is determined that the determination result of the normal symbol determination is not successful (step S406: NO), the lost symbol is set in the main RAM 103 (step S408).

  Following the processing of step S407 or step S408, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the current gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the normal gaming state based on whether or not the time-saving gaming flag is set to “ON”. Is determined (step S409). If it is determined that the current gaming state is the normal gaming state (step S409: YES), the normal symbol change time for displaying the normal symbol on the normal symbol display 45 is set to, for example, 25 seconds (step S410). . On the other hand, when it is determined that the current gaming state is not the normal gaming state (step S409: NO), the normal symbol variation time is set to 2 seconds, for example (step S411). Thus, the normal symbol variation time set by the process of step S410 or step S411 is temporarily stored in the main RAM 103.

  Following the processing of step S410 or step S411, the main CPU 101 starts normal symbol variation display by the ordinary symbol display 45 (step S412), and starts measuring the elapsed time from the start of the variation display (step S413). ).

  On the other hand, if the main CPU 101 determines that the normal symbol change display is being performed by the normal symbol display 45 (step S402: YES), the main CPU 101 determines whether or not to end the normal symbol change display (step S415). Specifically, whether or not to end the normal symbol variation display based on whether or not the elapsed time when the measurement was started by the process of step S413 has reached the normal symbol variation time set in step S410 or step S411. Determine whether. Here, when it is determined not to end the normal symbol variation display (step S415: NO), the process proceeds to the electric tulip process of step S5.

  When the main CPU 101 determines to end the normal symbol fluctuation display (step S415: YES), the main CPU 101 ends the normal symbol fluctuation display on the normal symbol display 45, and is set in the main RAM 103 by the process of step S407. The winning symbol or the lost symbol set in the main RAM 103 in the process of step S408 is stopped and displayed (step S416). And the elapsed time which started measurement by the process of step S413 is reset (step S417). Then, similarly to the process of step S406, it is determined whether or not the determination result of the normal symbol determination is correct (step S418). Here, when it is determined that the determination result of the normal symbol determination is a win (step S418: YES), the auxiliary game flag is set to “ON” (step S419). Thus, the auxiliary game flag is set to “ON”, whereby the auxiliary game for operating the electric tulip 17 is started.

[Electric tulip processing by game control board 100]
FIG. 25 is a detailed flowchart of the electric tulip process in step S5 of FIG. Following the normal symbol processing in step S4, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the auxiliary game flag is set to “ON” as illustrated in FIG. 25 (step S501). If it is determined that the auxiliary game flag is not set to “ON” (step S501: NO), the process proceeds to the specific area release control process in step S6.

  When determining that the auxiliary game flag is set to “ON” (step S501: YES), the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the electric tulip 17 is operating (step S502). If it is determined that the electric tulip 17 is not operating (step S502: NO), it is determined whether or not the current gaming state is the normal gaming state (step S503), as in the process of step S406. Here, when it is determined that the current gaming state is the normal gaming state (step S503: YES), as the operation pattern of the electric tulip 17, the operation of opening the second start port 12 for 0.1 second is performed once. The pattern is set in the main RAM 103 (step S504). On the contrary, when it is determined that the current gaming state is not the normal gaming state (step S503: NO), that is, when it is the short-time gaming state, the second start port 12 is set as the operation pattern of the electric tulip 17 for 0.3 seconds. An operation pattern for performing the opening operation five times is set in the main RAM 103 (step S505).

  After setting the operation pattern in step S504 or step S505, the main CPU 101 causes the electric tulip opening / closing unit 113 to start the operation of the electric tulip 17 in the set operation pattern (step S506).

  When the main CPU 101 executes the process of step S506 or determines that the electric tulip 17 is operating (step S502: YES), has the operation of the electric tulip 17 started in the process of step S506 been completed? It is determined whether or not (step S507). If it is determined that the operation of the electric tulip 17 has been completed (step S507: YES), the auxiliary game flag is set to “OFF” (step S508). Thereby, the auxiliary game is ended.

[Specific Area Open / Close Control Processing by Game Control Board 100]
When the result of the second special symbol determination is a small hit, the small hit game is executed by the specific area release control process in step S6. Hereinafter, the specific area release control process executed in the game control board 100 will be described with reference to FIGS. 26 and 27. Here, FIG. 26 and FIG. 27 are detailed flowcharts of the specific area release control processing in step S6 of FIG.

  Subsequent to the electric tulip process in step S5, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the small hit game flag is set to “ON” as illustrated in FIG. 26 and FIG. 27 (step S601). Here, if it is determined that the small hit game flag is not set to “ON” (step S601: NO), the process proceeds to the big winning opening release control process of step S7.

  When the main CPU 101 determines that the small hit game flag is set to “ON” (step S601: YES), for example, the elapsed time since the opening command related to the small hit game is set in the process of step S3203. Based on whether or not has reached a preset opening time, it is determined whether or not a small hit game is being opened (step S602). If it is determined that the opening is in progress (step S602: YES), it is determined whether or not the opening time has elapsed (step S603). Here, when it is determined that the opening time has not elapsed (step S603: NO), the process proceeds to the special winning opening release control process of step S7.

  When the main CPU 101 determines that the opening time has elapsed (step S603: YES), the main CPU 101 resets the number X of winning game balls to the specific winning port 19 stored in the main RAM 103 (step S604), and opens / closes the specific area. The opening control of the specific winning opening 19 by the unit 119 is started (step S605), and the measurement of the elapsed time since the opening control is started is started (step S606). By performing the processing of step S605, the blade member 90 performs the operation of closing the specific winning opening 19 after opening it for 3.2 seconds once.

  On the other hand, if the main CPU 101 determines that it is not opening in the small hit game (step S602: NO), for example, based on the elapsed time from the start of the small hit game, it is determined whether or not the small hit game is ending. Determination is made (step S608). Here, when it is determined that the ending in the small hit game is not in progress (step S608: NO), the specific winning opening switch 118 is turned “ON” based on the presence / absence of the detection signal input from the specific winning opening switch 118. It is determined whether or not (step S609). Here, when it is determined that the specific winning opening switch 118 is “ON” (step S609: YES), it is determined that one gaming ball has won the specific winning opening 19, and the winning number X of the gaming balls is calculated. The value updated by “1” is updated (step S610).

  When the process of step S610 is executed, the main CPU 101 determines that the specific winning opening switch 118 is not “ON” (step S609: NO), or if the process of step S606 is executed, the process of step S606 is performed. It is determined whether or not the elapsed time when the measurement is started matches a preset time (for example, 0.5 seconds) (step S611). Here, when it is determined that the set time has been reached (step S611: YES), the V winning opening opening / closing unit 122 is operated to operate the slide member 94 to open the V winning opening 92 (step S612). Thereby, the above-mentioned two types of big hits can be generated.

  When the main CPU 101 executes the process of step S612 or determines that the elapsed time does not coincide with the set time (step S611: NO), based on the presence or absence of the detection signal input from the V winning opening switch 120, It is determined whether or not the V prize opening switch 120 is “ON” (step S613). Here, when it is determined that the V prize opening switch 120 has been turned “ON” (step S613: YES), the V prize flag stored in the main RAM 103 is set to “ON” (step S614). This V winning flag is a flag indicating whether or not a game ball is won at the V winning opening 92 during the small hit game and two kinds of big wins are generated, and no gaming ball is won at the V winning opening 92 Is set to “OFF”, and is set to “ON” when a game ball wins the V winning opening 92.

  When the main CPU 101 executes the process of step S614, or determines that the V winning opening switch 120 is not “ON” (step S613: NO), whether or not it is the closing timing of the V winning opening 92 Is determined (step S615). Specifically, it is determined whether or not a predetermined time (0.2 seconds in the present embodiment) has elapsed since the V winning opening 92 was opened. Here, when it is determined that it is the closing timing (step S615: YES), the V winning opening 92 is closed by the V winning opening / closing unit 122 (step S616).

  When the main CPU 101 executes the process of step S616 or determines that it is not the closing timing of the V winning opening 92 (step S615: NO), the main CPU 101 determines the blades based on the elapsed time when the measurement is started by the process of step S606. It is determined whether or not the specified opening operation of the member 90 (one operation of opening the specific winning opening 19 for 3.2 seconds in this embodiment) has been completed (step S618).

  When the main CPU 101 determines that the specified release operation has not ended (step S618: NO), the main ball 102 stores the number X of game balls won in the specific winning opening 19 in the current small hit game in advance. It is determined whether or not it matches the number of game balls Xmax (for example, “6”) that defines the closing timing of the specific winning opening 19 (step S619). Here, when it is determined that the number X of winning prizes does not coincide with the number of gaming balls Xmax (step S619: NO), the process proceeds to the big prize opening opening control process of step S7.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines that the winning number X matches the number of game balls Xmax (step S619: YES), or when it is determined that the prescribed release operation has ended (step S618: YES), the process of step S605 is performed. The opening control of the started specific winning opening 19 is ended (step S620), the elapsed time at which the measurement was started in step S606 is reset (step S621), and the ending time measurement is started (step S622). Here, the ending refers to a period from the end of opening the specific winning opening 19 to the end of the small hit game.

  If the main CPU 101 determines in step S608 that ending is in progress (step S608: YES), as illustrated in FIG. 27, the ending time at which the measurement is started in step S622 is preset. It is determined whether or not the ending time has elapsed based on whether or not the ending time for the game has been reached (step S625). Here, when it is determined that the ending time has not elapsed (step S625: NO), the process proceeds to the special winning opening release control process of step S7.

  If the main CPU 101 determines that the preset ending time has elapsed (step S625: YES), the main CPU 101 sets the small hit game flag to “OFF” in order to end the small hit game (step S626), and receives a V prize. It is determined whether or not the flag is set to “ON” (step S627). If it is determined that the V winning flag is not set to “ON” (step S627: NO), it is determined that the game ball has not won the V winning opening 92 during the small hit game, and step S7. The process proceeds to the special prize opening opening control process. In this case, the special game ends only with the small hit game.

  On the other hand, if the main CPU 101 determines that the V winning flag is set to “ON” (step S627: YES), the main CPU 101 sets the V winning flag to “OFF” (step S628) and follows the small hit game. In order to start the long open round game, the long winning game flag is set to “ON” (step S629), and the short-time game flag is set to “OFF” (step S630).

[Large winning opening opening control processing by game control board 100]
Hereinafter, the special winning opening opening control process executed by the game control board 100 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 28 is a detailed flowchart of the special winning opening opening control process in step S7 of FIG. Following the specific area release control process in step S6, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the long winning game flag is set to “ON” as illustrated in FIG. 28 (step S71). Here, when it is determined that the long winning game flag is set to “ON” (step S71: YES), the long winning game control process is executed (step S72). This long hit game control process will be described in detail later with reference to FIG.

  When the main CPU 101 determines that the long winning game flag is not set to “ON” (step S71: NO), the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the short winning game flag is set to “ON” (step S75). . Here, when it is determined that the short hit game flag is “ON” (step S75: YES), a short hit game control process is executed (step S76). The short hit game control process will be described in detail later based on FIG.

  When the process of step S76 is executed, when the process of step S72 is executed, or when it is determined that the short hit game flag is not set to “ON” (step S75: NO), the process of step S8 Processing proceeds to award ball processing.

[Outline of opening pattern of special prize opening 13 and production during special game]
Next, with reference to FIG. 29, the opening pattern of the special winning opening 13 and the effects during the special game will be described.

  FIG. 29A shows the relationship between the opening pattern of the special winning opening 13 and the performance during the game per 4R length when the game per 4R length is performed for "4R without time limit" or "per 4R with time limit". FIG. When the opening command related to the long win game of 1 type is transmitted to the effect control board 130, the opening effect is started as illustrated in FIG. Then, as the long open round game in which the grand prize opening 13 is opened for a maximum of 29 seconds is repeatedly executed with a predetermined interval time between them, an effect during the round is executed each time the long open round game is started. Is done. This in-round effect includes, for example, an effect that displays the number of times that the special game has been performed continuously from the short-time game state to the normal game state, and an effect that informs the current number of rounds. When all the long open round games are finished and the ending command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, the ending effect is executed until a predetermined ending time elapses.

  FIG. 29B is a diagram illustrating a relationship between the opening pattern of the big winning opening 13 and the effect during the 15R short win game when the 15R short win game is performed with respect to “suddenly short win”. When the opening command related to the short hit game of 1 type jackpot is transmitted to the effect control board 130, the short win effect is started. In this case, a short open round game that opens the grand prize winning opening 13 for 0.2 seconds is executed 15 times at a predetermined time interval (for example, every 1 second), but the time required for the short win game is relatively short. A series of the above short win effects is executed until a predetermined ending time elapses after all short open round games are finished and an ending command is transmitted.

  FIG. 29C is a diagram showing the relationship between the opening pattern of the special winning opening 13 and the effect during the game per 15R length when a game per 15R length is performed for “per 15R with time reduction”. When a game ball wins the V winning opening 92 during the small hit game, from the second round, a long open round game in which the large winning opening 13 is opened long is repeatedly executed with a predetermined interval time interposed therebetween. During the game per 15R length, in addition to the in-round effect described with reference to FIG. 29A, a music effect is performed. Specifically, a music selection screen (not shown) is displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 5 in the second round (during the first long open round game after the end of the small hit game). The music selected by the player using the effect key 27 before the third round is started is continuously played during the third and subsequent rounds. That is, the music selected by the player is output from the speaker 24 and the video of the music is reproduced on the main liquid crystal display device 5. The music reproduction selected by the player in this way may be performed when the game is controlled in the short-time game state after the game is finished per 15R length.

  In this embodiment, the case where music selection is performed in the second round of the game per long game will be described. However, a configuration in which music selection can be performed at any time during the game per long game may be employed. Or you may employ | adopt the structure which can perform music selection, when the game is controlled in a short-time game state. Moreover, you may employ | adopt the structure which can perform a music selection during a short hit game.

  Note that the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment also has a feature that the number of songs that can be selected by the player increases every time a new song is first announced. Specifically, during the game per 15R length before the first new song announcement effect of new song A is performed, a song selection screen that allows selection of only default songs is displayed. On the other hand, during the game per 15R length after the first new song announcement effect of the new song A is performed, a song selection screen capable of selecting the default song or the new song A is displayed. Then, when the first new song announcement effect of the new song B is performed, a song selection screen capable of selecting the default song, the new song A, or the new song B is displayed. If the selected song cannot be played immediately because the new song announcement effect has started even though the player has selected the song, or the song playback is interrupted, the new song will be announced. After the production is finished, the selected music is played from the beginning.

[Game control processing per long by the game control board 100]
FIG. 30 is a detailed flowchart of the long hit game control process in step S72 of FIG. When the main CPU 101 determines that the long winning game flag is set to “ON” (step S71: YES), as illustrated in FIG. 30, for example, the opening command related to the long winning game by the process of step S3203 Based on whether or not the elapsed time from setting has reached a predetermined opening time, it is determined whether or not a long hit game is being opened (step S721). Here, when it is determined that the opening is being performed (step S721: YES), it is determined whether the opening time has passed based on whether the elapsed time has reached the predetermined opening time (step S722). ). Here, when it is determined that the opening time has not elapsed (step S722: NO), the process proceeds to a prize ball process in step S8.

  If the main CPU 101 determines that the opening time has elapsed (step S722: YES), the main CPU 101 determines the number of rounds Rmax of the special game, the operation pattern of the big prize control unit 116, and the like, and stores these pieces of information in the main RAM 103. (Step S723). By executing the processing of step S723, various times related to the long game such as the interval time between rounds and the next round, and the ending time after the end of the final round are also set.

  Following the processing of step S723, the main CPU 101 resets the winning number Y of game balls to the big winning opening 13 stored in the main RAM 103 (step S724), and the long hit game also stored in the main RAM 103. The round number R in the middle is updated to a value obtained by adding “1” (step S725). The number of rounds R is set to “0” before the start of the game per long, and is incremented by “1” every time the process of step S725 is performed.

  Subsequent to the processing in step S725, the main CPU 101 starts the opening control of the special winning opening 13 by the special winning opening control unit 116 (step S726), and the opening time that is an elapsed time from the start of the release control. Measurement is started (step S727). Then, a round start command for notifying that the long open round game has started is set in the main RAM 103 (step S728).

  When the main CPU 101 determines that the opening in the long hit game is not in progress (step S721: NO), for example, based on the information indicating the time point in the long hit game in which the current state is stored in the main RAM 103, for example. Then, it is determined whether or not the ending immediately after the end of the final round is in progress (step S729). If it is determined that ending is in progress (step S729: YES), the process proceeds to step S744 described later.

  If the main CPU 101 determines that ending in the long hit game is not in progress (step S729: NO), for example, based on information indicating the current point in the long hit game stored in the main RAM 103. Then, it is determined whether or not it is during the interval (between the round and the next round) (step S730). Here, when it is determined that it is during the interval (step S730: YES), it is determined whether or not the interval time set by the process of step S723 has elapsed since the big winning opening 13 was closed at the end of the previous round. Determination is made (step S731). If it is determined that the interval time has elapsed (step S731: YES), the process proceeds to step S724 because the timing for starting the next round is reached. Conversely, if it is determined that the interval time has not elapsed (step S731: NO), the process proceeds to a prize ball process in step S8.

  On the other hand, if the main CPU 101 determines that it is not during the interval (step S730: NO), the main CPU 101 determines that it is in a round and determines whether or not the winning prize opening is based on the presence or absence of the detection signal from the winning prize opening switch 115. It is determined whether or not the switch 115 is “ON” (step S733). Here, when it is determined that the big prize opening switch 115 is “ON” (step S733: YES), it is judged that one game ball has won the big prize opening 13, and the number Y of game balls won is calculated. The value is updated to the value obtained by adding “1” (step S734).

  When the main CPU 101 executes the process of step S728, executes the process of step S734, or determines that the big prize opening switch 115 is not “ON” (step S733: NO), the main CPU 101 It is determined whether or not the specified opening time has elapsed from the opening start (step S735). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the opening time at which measurement is started by the process of step S727 has reached a specified opening time (29 seconds in the present embodiment) stored in advance in the main ROM 102.

  When the main CPU 101 determines that the specified opening time has not elapsed (step S735: NO), the winning number Y of the game balls in the current round stored in the main RAM 103 is stored in the main ROM 102 in advance. It is determined whether or not the number of game balls Ymax (for example, “9”) defining the closing timing of the special winning opening 13 coincides (step S736). If it is determined that the winning number Y does not match the gaming ball number Ymax (step S736: NO), the process proceeds to a winning ball process in step S8.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines that the winning number Y matches the number of gaming balls Ymax (step S736: YES), or when it is determined that the specified opening time has elapsed (step S735: YES), the big winning opening control unit 116 terminates the opening control of the special winning opening 13 (step S737).

  Subsequent to the process in step S737, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the current round number R of the game per long stored in the main RAM 103 matches the round number Rmax set in the process in step S723. (Step S738). Here, when it is determined that the number of rounds R does not match the number of rounds Rmax (step S738: NO), this is the elapsed time since the big winning opening 13 is closed in order to control the start timing of the next round. Measurement of the interval time is started (step S739). The interval time when the measurement is started by the process of step S739 is used for the process of step S731.

  On the other hand, if the main CPU 101 determines that the round number R matches the round number Rmax (step S738: YES), the main CPU 101 starts measuring the ending time (step S740) and resets the round number R stored in the main RAM 103. Then, an ending command is set in the main RAM 103 (step S742). This ending command is a command for notifying that the final opening of the special winning opening 13 has been completed, and is transmitted to the effect control board 130 by the transmission process of step S9.

  When the main CPU 101 executes the process of step S742 or determines that the ending is being performed (step S729: YES), the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the set ending time has elapsed (step S744). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the ending time at which measurement is started by the process of step S740 has reached the set ending time set by the process of step S723. If it is determined that the ending time has not elapsed (step S744: NO), the process proceeds to a prize ball process in step S8.

  When the main CPU 101 determines that the set ending time has elapsed (step S744: YES), the main CPU 101 executes a game state setting process for setting the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 after the long hitting game (step S745). Then, in order to end the long winning game, the long winning game flag is set to “OFF” (step S746). The gaming state setting process will be described in detail later based on FIG.

[Short hit game control processing by game control board 100]
FIG. 31 is a detailed flowchart of the short hit game control process in step S76 of FIG. When the main CPU 101 determines that the short hit game flag is set to “ON” (step S75: YES), as illustrated in FIG. 31, for example, the opening command related to the short win game is executed by the process of step S3203. Whether or not the short hit game is being opened is determined based on whether or not the elapsed time since setting has reached a predetermined opening time (step S761). Here, when it is determined that the opening is being performed (step S761: YES), it is determined whether the opening time has passed based on whether the elapsed time has reached the predetermined opening time (step S762). ). Here, when it is determined that the opening time has not elapsed (step S762: NO), the process proceeds to a prize ball process in step S8.

  When the main CPU 101 determines that the opening time has elapsed (step S762: YES), the main CPU 101 determines the number Rmax of special games, the operation pattern of the special winning prize control unit 116, and stores these pieces of information in the main RAM 103. (Step S763). By executing the process of step S723, various times related to the short hit game such as the interval time between rounds and the next round, and the ending time after the end of the final round are also set.

  Subsequent to the processing in step S763, the main CPU 101 updates the round number R in the short hit game stored in the main RAM 103 to a value obtained by adding “1” (step S764). This round number R is set to “0” before the start of the short hit game, similarly to the case where the long hit game is performed, and is incremented by “1” every time the process of step S764 is performed.

  Subsequent to the processing in step S764, the main CPU 101 starts the opening control of the special winning opening 13 by the special winning opening control unit 116 (step S765), and the opening time which is an elapsed time since the opening control is started. Measurement is started (step S766).

  If the main CPU 101 determines that the opening in the short win game is not in progress (step S761: NO), for example, based on information indicating the time point in the short hit game in which the current state is stored in the main RAM 103, for example. Then, it is determined whether or not the ending immediately after the end of the final round is in progress (step S767). If the main CPU 101 determines that the ending in the short win game is not being performed (step S767: NO), for example, based on information indicating the time point in the short win game that the current state stored in the main RAM 103 is. Then, it is determined whether or not it is during the interval (step S768). Here, if it is determined that the interval is in progress (step S768: YES), it is determined whether or not the interval time set by the process of step S763 has elapsed since the big winning opening 13 was closed at the end of the previous round. Determination is made (step S769). If it is determined that the interval time has elapsed (step S769: YES), the process proceeds to step S764 because it is time to start the next round. On the other hand, when it is determined that the interval time has not elapsed (step S769: NO), the process proceeds to a prize ball process in step S8.

  On the other hand, if the main CPU 101 determines that the interval is not in progress (step S768: NO), the main CPU 101 determines whether or not a specified opening time has elapsed since the opening of the special winning opening 13 (step S771). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the opening time at which the measurement is started by the process of step S766 has reached a specified opening time (0.2 seconds in this embodiment) stored in the main ROM 102 in advance. . Here, when it is determined that the specified opening time has not elapsed (step S771: NO), the process proceeds to a prize ball process in step S8.

  When the main CPU 101 determines that the specified opening time has elapsed (step S771: YES), the main CPU 101 causes the special winning opening control unit 116 to end the opening control of the special winning opening 13 (step S772).

  Following the process of step S772, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the current round number R of the short hit game stored in the main RAM 103 matches the round number Rmax set by the process of step S763. (Step S773). Here, when it is determined that the number of rounds R does not match the number of rounds Rmax (step S773: NO), this is the elapsed time since the big winning opening 13 is closed in order to control the start timing of the next round. Measurement of the interval time is started (step S774). The interval time when the measurement is started by the process of step S774 is used for the process of step S769.

  On the other hand, if the main CPU 101 determines that the round number R matches the round number Rmax (step S773: YES), the main CPU 101 starts measuring the ending time (step S775), and resets the round number R stored in the main RAM 103. Then, the ending command is set in the main RAM 103 (step S777). This ending command is transmitted to the effect control board 130 by the transmission process in step S9, similarly to the ending command related to the long hit game.

  When the main CPU 101 executes the process of step S777 or determines that the ending is being performed (step S767: YES), the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the set ending time has elapsed (step S779). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the ending time at which measurement is started by the process of step S775 has reached the set ending time set by the process of step S763. If it is determined that the ending time has not elapsed (step S779: NO), the process proceeds to a prize ball process in step S8.

  When the main CPU 101 determines that the set ending time has elapsed (step S779: YES), the main CPU 101 executes a game state setting process for setting the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 after the short hit game (step S780). Then, in order to end the short hit game, the short hit game flag is set to “OFF” (step S781).

[Game state setting process by game control board 100]
FIG. 32 is a detailed flowchart of the gaming state setting process in step S745 in FIG. 30 and step S780 in FIG. This gaming state setting process is a process for setting the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 after the long winning game or the short winning game is ended to the normal gaming state or the short-time gaming state.

  First, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the special game played this time is a long hit game based on, for example, whether the long hit game flag or the short hit game flag is set to “ON” ( Step S7451). Here, if it is determined that the game is not long hit (step S7451: NO), that is, if the short hit game flag is set to “ON”, the process proceeds to step S7452.

  In the present embodiment, since the short hit game is played only when the result of the first special symbol determination is suddenly short hit, the short time is always given after the short hit game is played. Therefore, the main CPU 101 sets the time-saving game flag to “ON” in step S7452. Then, the short time remaining game count W is set to “100” (step S7453).

  On the other hand, if the main CPU 101 determines that the game is a long winning game (step S7451: YES), the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the current long winning game is a long winning game following the small hit game (step S7454). In the present embodiment, when a long hit game is performed following the small hit game, that is, when two types of big hits are made, the long hit game flag is set to “ON” by the process of step S629 (see FIG. 27). On the other hand, in the case where only the long hit game is played without playing the small hit game, that is, in the case of one type big hit, the long hit game flag is set to “ON” by the process of step S3193 (see FIG. 23). . Therefore, based on which processing step the long hit game flag is set to “ON”, it can be determined whether or not the current long hit game is a long hit game following the small hit game.

  When the main CPU 101 determines that the game is not a long winning game following the small winning game (step S7454: NO), the main CPU 101 is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 41 or the second special symbol display 42 at the start of the long winning game. Based on the jackpot symbol, it is determined whether or not there is a short time after the long hit game (step S7455). On the contrary, when it is determined that the game is a long hit game following the small hit game (step S7454: YES), the long hit is based on the small hit symbol stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 42 at the start of the small hit game. It is determined whether or not there is a short time after the game is over (step S7456).

  Then, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the determination result in step S7455 or step S7456 is a short time (step S7457). If it is determined that there is a short time (step S7457: YES), step S7452 and step The process of S7453 is executed. Thus, the game is controlled in the short game state when the second start port 12 is easily opened until the special symbol determination is executed 100 times after the long hit game is completed. On the other hand, when it is determined that there is no time saving (step S7457: NO), the processing of step S7452 and step S7453 is not performed, and therefore the second start port 12 is difficult to be opened after the long hit game is completed. The game is controlled in the normal game state.

  When this series of game state setting processes is completed, the process proceeds to step S746 (see FIG. 30) when the long hit game ends, and when the short hit game ends, the process proceeds to step S781 (see FIG. 31). ) Will proceed.

[Timer interrupt processing by production control board 130]
When the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, the sub CPU 131 of the effect control board 130 sets a CTC cycle, which is a cycle for performing timer interrupt processing to be described later. And sub CPU131 repeats the random number update process which updates the production random number etc. which are used in order to determine the content of production with the predetermined period shorter than a CTC period. That is, the sub CPU 131 repeats the timer interrupt process at the CTC cycle while repeating the random number update process at a predetermined cycle while the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated.

  Hereinafter, the timer interrupt process executed in the effect control board 130 will be described with reference to FIG. Here, FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing an example of a timer interrupt process executed in the effect control board 130. Similar to the timer interrupt process performed on the game control board 100, the sub CPU 131 repeatedly executes a series of processes illustrated in FIG. 33 at regular time intervals (for example, 4 milliseconds). Note that the processing performed on the effect control board 130 described based on the flowcharts of FIG. 33 and thereafter is performed according to a command issued by the sub CPU 131 based on a program stored in the sub ROM 132.

  First, when receiving a command as game information from the game control board 100, the sub CPU 131 executes a command reception process (step S10). Details of this command reception process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  Subsequent to the process of step S10, the sub CPU 131 determines whether or not the effect button 26 or the effect key 27 has been operated based on whether or not the operation information is input from the effect button 26 or the effect key 27 (step S11). ). If it is determined that the effect button 26 or the effect key 27 has been operated (step S11: YES), an operation command for notifying that is set in the sub-RAM 133 (step S12). By transmitting this operation command to the image sound control board 140 and the lamp control board 150, processing for realizing an effect on the effect according to the operation of the effect button 26 or the effect key 27 is performed.

  When the sub CPU 131 determines “NO” in step S11 or when the process of step S12 is executed, the sub CPU 131 executes a command transmission process (step S13). Specifically, the command set in the sub-RAM 133 by the processing of step S10 or step S12 is transmitted to the image sound control board 140 and the lamp control board 150. By performing this command transmission process, the image acoustic control board 140 is instructed to execute an effect by image display, audio output, etc., and the lamp control is performed by turning on various lamps or operating the logo accessory 7. Instructed to the substrate 150.

[Command reception processing by effect control board 130]
Hereinafter, the command reception process executed in the effect control board 130 will be described with reference to FIGS. 34 to 36. Here, FIGS. 34 to 36 are detailed flowcharts of the command receiving process in step S10 of FIG. The sub CPU 131 determines whether or not a hold command transmitted from the game control board 100 has been received (step S101). If it is determined that a hold command has been received (step S101: YES), the number of holds for the first special symbol determination stored in the sub RAM 133 is updated to a value obtained by adding “1” (step S102). Then, a hold display command for instructing the update of the hold display image indicating that the first special symbol determination is held is set in the sub-RAM 133 (step S103). This hold display command is transmitted to at least the image sound control board 140 by the command transmission process of step S13.

  When the sub CPU 131 executes the process of step S103 or determines that the hold command has not been received (step S101: NO), the sub CPU 131 determines whether or not the changing effect accompanying the change display of the special symbol is being executed. Determination is made (step S104). Specifically, for example, the variation time of the special symbol is specified based on the information indicating the variation pattern of the special symbol included in the variation start command transmitted from the game control board 100, and the variation start command is received. Based on whether or not the variation time has elapsed, it is determined whether or not the variation effect accompanying the variation display of the special symbol is being executed.

  When the sub CPU 131 determines that the variation effect accompanying the variation display of the special symbol is not being executed (step S104: NO), the sub CPU 131 determines whether or not a variation start command has been received from the game control board 100 (step S105). . Here, when it is determined that the change start command has been received (step S105: YES), the change start command is analyzed (step S106).

  In the variation start command, as described above, the determination symbol setting information indicating the determination result of the jackpot determination processing, the setting information indicating whether the effect with reach or the effect without reach is performed, and the setting information of the variation pattern , Information indicating the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is included. Therefore, by analyzing the variation start command, the result of the special symbol determination is identified, whether it is necessary to perform the effect with reach or the effect without reach, and the variation time during which the special symbol is variably displayed is identified. In addition, the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be specified.

  When the variation start command is analyzed, the sub CPU 131 executes variation effect pattern selection processing based on the analysis result (step S107).

  Although not shown in the figure, in the sub ROM 132, at least four of a jackpot effect table, an effect table with lose reach, an effect table without lose reach, and an effect table with respect to the change effect accompanying the change display of the special symbol are displayed. An effect table is stored. Each of these effect tables is provided with a plurality of tables corresponding to the variation pattern (variation time) determined in the game control board 100. For example, tables for 4 seconds, 8 seconds, and 12 seconds are provided in the effect table without losing reach, and tables for 1 minute, 1 minute 30 seconds, and 2 minutes are provided in the jackpot effect table. ing. The sub CPU 131 selects one table from the plurality of tables based on the setting information included in the change start command. For example, when the setting information includes information indicating “losing”, information indicating that “reaching-free production” is performed, and information on a variation pattern indicating that the “variation time” of the special symbol is 4 seconds, The sub CPU 131 selects the lossless reach effect table for 4 seconds.

  In the effect table, effect random numbers and effect patterns are associated with each other. The sub CPU 131 acquires the value at the time when the change start command is received for the effect random number that is updated each time the random number update process described above is performed, and stores a number of effect patterns stored in the selected effect table. One effect pattern is selected by reading an effect pattern corresponding to the effect random number acquired in advance.

  As a result, the effect pattern (variation pattern of the decorative design, etc.) of the variation effect performed using the main liquid crystal display device 5, whether or not to activate the logo accessory 7, and the operation when the logo accessory 7 is activated The contents of effects by each effect means such as the pattern, the light emission pattern of the frame lamp 25, and the output pattern of the sound output from the speaker 24 regarding the variable effect are determined.

  As described above, the effect content and the start / end timing are set in the effect control board 130 based on the game information (various commands) transmitted from the game control board 100 for the change effect accompanying the change display of the special symbol. . On the other hand, the type of new song (music) to be reproduced in the above-described new song announcement effect, the time when the new song announcement effect is performed, the screen configuration of the main liquid crystal display device 5 during the new song announcement effect or the announcement announcement effect, etc. It is set in the image sound control board 140 regardless of the game information. The processing in the image sound control board 140 will be described in detail later.

  Subsequently, the sub CPU 131 sets a change effect start command for instructing start of a change effect of the effect pattern selected in the process of step S107 in the sub RAM 133 (step S108).

  This variation effect start command is transmitted to the image sound control board 140 and the lamp control board 150 by the command transmission process of step S13. Thereby, the fluctuating effect in which the effect pattern is determined on the effect control board 130 is realized by the image sound control board 140 and the lamp control board 150.

  Subsequent to step S108, the sub CPU 131 updates the number of suspensions of the first special symbol determination stored in the sub RAM 133 to a value obtained by subtracting “1” (step S109).

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 131 determines that the variation effect accompanying the variation display of the special symbol is being executed (step S104: YES), the sub CPU 131 determines whether or not the symbol determination command is received from the game control board 100 (step S104). 111). If it is determined that the symbol confirmation command has not been received (step S111: NO), the process proceeds to step S11.

  If the sub CPU 131 determines that the symbol confirmation command has been received (step S111: YES), the sub CPU 131 sets a variation effect end command for instructing the end of the variation effect accompanying the variation display of the special symbol in the sub RAM 133 (step S112).

  This variation effect end command is transmitted to the image sound control board 140 and the lamp control board 150 by the command transmission process of step S13. Thereby, the fluctuating effect started in accordance with the process of step S108 is finished, and the decorative symbol indicating the result of the special symbol determination is stopped and displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 5.

  When the sub CPU 131 executes the process of step S109 or determines that the change start command is not received (step S105: NO), the sub CPU 131 executes the following process related to the special game. That is, as illustrated in FIG. 35, the sub CPU 131 determines whether an opening command has been received from the game control board 100 (step S114).

  When the sub CPU 131 determines that the opening command has been received (step S114: YES), the sub CPU 131 analyzes the opening command (step S115). Specifically, based on information included in the opening command, a process of determining whether the opening performed this time is related to a long hit game or a short hit game is performed.

  Based on the analysis result of step S115, the sub CPU 131 determines whether or not the current opening is related to a long hit game (step S116). Here, when it is determined that the game pertains to a long hit game (see FIGS. 29A and 29C) (step S116: YES), an effect pattern of an opening effect performed during the opening is selected (step S117). Then, an opening effect start command for instructing execution of the opening effect of the selected effect pattern is set in the sub-RAM 133 (step S118).

  This opening effect start command is transmitted to the image sound control board 140 and the lamp control board 150 by the transmission process of step S13. As a result, an opening effect including an effect of notifying that the long hit game is started and an effect of prompting a right strike are performed.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, as the opening effect, an effect using the latest song announced in the new song announcement effect is performed. Specifically, for example, when a new song announcement effect for the new song A has already been performed but a new song announcement effect for the new song B has not yet been performed, a part of the video of the new song A reproduced in the new song announcement effect is used. Opening performance is performed. For example, if a new song announcement effect for new song D has already been performed but a new song announcement effect for new song E has not yet been performed, an opening effect using a part of the video of new song D reproduced in the new song announcement effect is performed. Done.

  In this way, since the opening effect is configured based on the video of the new song that was played in the new song announcement effect that was performed independently of the normal effect, the player will be able to play the contents of the opening effect every time the first new song is announced. You can enjoy watching it change. The processing performed by the image sound control board 140 in order to realize such a change in opening effect will be described in detail later.

  When the sub CPU 131 determines that the current opening does not relate to the long win game (step S116: NO), that is, relates to the short win game (see FIG. 29B), An effect pattern of a short win effect performed between the opening and the end of the ending is selected (step S119), and a short hit effect start command for instructing execution of the short hit effect of the selected effect pattern is set in the sub-RAM 133 (step S119). S120).

  The short hit effect start command is transmitted to the image sound control board 140 and the lamp control board 150 by the transmission process in step S13, and a short hit effect including an effect for prompting a right-handed strike is performed.

  As for the short win effect, as with the long hit game opening effect, each time the first new song announcement effect is performed, the effect is switched so that the video corresponding to the latest song is used, in order to realize this The processing performed on the image sound control board 140 will also be described in detail later.

  When the sub CPU 131 determines that the opening command has not been received (step S114: NO), when the process of step S118 is executed, or when the process of step S120 is executed, the game control is performed at the start of the long open round game. It is determined whether or not a round start command transmitted from the substrate 100 has been received (step S122).

  When the sub CPU 131 determines that the round start command has been received (step S122: YES), the sub CPU 131 analyzes the received round start command (step S123). Based on the analysis result, the current long open round game is 15R long. It is determined whether or not it is the first long open round game (2R in FIG. 29C) in the winning game (step S124).

  If the sub CPU 131 determines that it is the first long open round game (step S124: YES), the sub CPU 131 sets a music selection screen display command for instructing the image sound control board 140 to display a music selection screen in the sub RAM 133. (Step S125). Here, the music selection screen is a screen that displays the music to be played during the period from the start of the 3R of the long hit game to the start of the ending effect, and the player operates the effect key 27. Thus, a desired new song can be selected. The music selection screen display command is transmitted to the image sound control board 140 by the command transmission process of step S13, and thereby the music selection screen is displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 5.

  When the sub CPU 131 executes the process of step S125 or determines that it is not the first long open round game (step S124: NO), the round start command received this time is the next long open round game (FIG. 29). It is determined whether or not to notify the start of 3R) in (C) (step S126). Here, when it is determined that the round start command notifies the start of the next long open round game (step S126: YES), the player operates the effect key 27 during the first long open round game. A music playback command for instructing to start playback of the selected music is set in the sub-RAM 133 (step S127).

  This music reproduction command is transmitted to the image sound control board 140 by the command transmission process of step S13. Thereby, the music selected by the player is played from the third round of the game per 15R length.

  When the sub CPU 131 executes the process of step S127 or determines that it is not the next long open round game (step S126: NO), the number of continuations of the special game (number of consecutive changs) or the round start command received this time The number of rounds corresponding to is determined and an effect pattern during the round is selected (step S128), and an in-round effect start command for instructing the image sound control board 140 to execute the effect during the round of the selected effect pattern is sent to the sub-RAM 133. Set (step S129). As a result, the display indicating the current number of rounds displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 5 is updated.

  When the sub CPU 131 determines that the round start command has not been received (step S122: NO), or when the process of step S129 is executed, an ending command is sent from the game control board 100 as illustrated in FIG. It is determined whether or not it has been received (step S131). Here, when it is determined that the ending command has been received (step S131: YES), the received ending command is analyzed (step S132), and it is determined whether or not the ending is related to the end of the long hit game ( Step S133). Here, when it is determined that the game pertains to a long hit game (step S133: YES), an effect pattern for the ending effect is selected (step S134), and an ending for instructing execution of the ending effect of the selected effect pattern. An effect start command is set in the sub-RAM 133 (step S135).

  This ending effect start command is transmitted to the image sound control board 140 by the command transmission process of step S13. Thus, as will be described in detail later, an ending effect using the same music image as the music used in the opening effect is performed.

  On the other hand, if the sub CPU 131 determines that the ending is not related to the long hit game (step S133: NO), that is, if the ending is related to the short hit game, the short CPU started in accordance with the process of step S120 above. A short hit effect end command for instructing the end of the hit effect is set in the sub-RAM 133 (step S136).

  This short win effect end command is transmitted to the image sound control board 140 by the command transmission process of step S13. As a result, the short win effect ends after the ending time has elapsed.

  When the sub CPU 131 determines that an ending command has not been received (step S131: NO), when the process of step S135 is executed, or when the process of step S136 is executed, a waiting-for-customer command is issued from the game control board 100. It is determined whether or not it has been received (step S138). Here, when it is determined that the customer waiting command has been received (step S138: YES), the measurement of the elapsed time since reception of the customer waiting command is started (step S139), and the measurement flag stored in the sub RAM 133 is received. Is set to “ON” (step S140). This measurement flag is a flag indicating whether or not the elapsed time since reception of the customer waiting command is being measured.

  When it is determined that the customer waiting command has not been received (step S138: NO), the sub CPU 131 determines whether or not the measurement flag is set to “ON” (step S141). Here, when it is determined that the measurement flag is not set to “ON” (step S141: NO), a series of command reception processing ends, and the processing proceeds to step S11.

  When the sub CPU 131 determines that the measurement flag is set to “ON” (step S141: YES), or when the process of step S140 is executed, the customer waiting determination time for defining the start timing of the customer waiting effect is determined. It is determined whether or not the time has elapsed (step S142). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the elapsed time when measurement is started in the process of step S139 has reached a customer waiting determination time (for example, 30 seconds) stored in the sub ROM 132. If it is determined that the customer waiting determination time has not elapsed (step S142: NO), the process proceeds to step S11.

  When the sub CPU 131 determines that the customer waiting determination time has elapsed (step S142: YES), the measurement flag is set to “OFF” (step S143), the elapsed time is reset (step S144), and the customer waiting effect is displayed. A customer waiting effect start command for instructing the start is set in the sub-RAM 133 (step S145).

  This customer waiting effect start command is transmitted to the image sound control board 140 by the command transmission process of step S13. Thereby, a predetermined demonstration screen display waiting for the customer is started.

[Configuration Example of Control ROM 144]
FIG. 37 is a block diagram illustrating a configuration example of the control ROM 144. As shown in FIG. 37, the control ROM 144 stores a public management table, a presentation order management table, and a display list creation table in addition to programs executed by the overall CPU 141.

  The public management table is a table that defines the date and time for each new song to be shifted to a state in which execution of the first new song announcement effect of the new song is permitted. The disclosure management table will be described in detail later based on FIG.

  The presentation order management table is a table that is referred to in order to perform a new song announcement effect while switching songs every hour after completion of the new song announcement effect of all new songs performed weekly. The presentation order management table will be described later in detail with reference to FIG. In the following description, the state in which this presentation order management table is used is referred to as “all songs released state”.

  The display list creation table is an effect pattern table used for processing to determine an effect pattern of effects to be executed by the main liquid crystal display device 5 and the sub liquid crystal display device 6. The process of determining the effect pattern here determines what kind of image data is actually used to realize the effect when the effect of the effect content determined on the effect control board 130 is executed. It is processing.

  The display list creation table is a table used to create a display list stored in the display list storage area 1491. The display list creation table is mainly used for normal effects performed using the main liquid crystal display device 5 and the sub liquid crystal display device 6. It is referred to to control the announcement effect performed using. In this embodiment, the display list creation table is a default table, a new song A main table, a new song B main table, a new song C main table, a new song D main table, a new song E main table, a new song F main table, a new song G main table, A new song H main table, a new song I main table, a new song J main table, a new song K main table, a new song L main table, and a dot effect table.

  The default table is a table used before the first new song announcement effect of the new song A is performed. The new song A main table is a table that is used after the first new song announcement effect of the new song A is performed until the first new song announcement effect of the new song B is performed. The new song B main table is a table that is used after the first new song announcement effect of the new song B is performed until the first new song announcement effect of the new song C is performed. The new song C main table is a table that is used after the first new song announcement effect of the new song C is performed until the first new song announcement effect of the new song D is performed. The new song E main table is a table that is used from when the first new song announcement effect of the new song E is performed until the first new song announcement effect of the new song F is performed. The new song F main table is a table that is used after the first new song announcement effect of the new song F is performed until the first new song announcement effect of the new song G is performed. The new song G main table is a table that is used after the first new song announcement effect of the new song G is performed until the first new song announcement effect of the new song H is performed. The new song H main table is a table that is used after the first new song announcement effect of the new song H is performed until the first new song announcement effect of the new song I is performed. The new song I main table is a table that is used after the first new song announcement effect of the new song I is performed until the first new song announcement effect of the new song J is performed. The new song J main table is a table that is used after the first new song announcement effect of the new song J is performed until the first new song announcement effect of the new song K is performed. The new song K main table is a table that is used after the first new song announcement effect of the new song K is performed until the first new song announcement effect of the new song L is performed. The new song L main table is a table used for one week from when the first new song announcement effect of the new song L is performed until all songs are released. Thus, the new song A main table to the new song L main table are tables that are used for a predetermined week. In the all-music release state, a normal performance is performed while switching these display list creation tables every hour.

  The dot effect table is a table used when a normal effect is performed with dot display in the lower area. That is, the dot effect table is a table used during the announcement announcement effect or the new song announcement effect.

  The overall CPU 141 creates a display list using any of the 14 tables constituting the public management table and the display list creation table before all songs are released. In the state where all songs are released, the display list is created using either the presentation order management table or the 14 tables. A method for creating such a display list will be described in detail later.

[Timer interrupt processing by image sound control board 140]
Next, a timer interrupt process executed in the image sound control board 140 will be described with reference to FIG. Here, FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing an example of timer interruption processing executed in the image sound control board 140. The image acoustic control board 140 repeatedly executes a series of processes illustrated in FIG. 38 at regular intervals (for example, 33 milliseconds) during normal operation except for special cases such as when the power is turned on and when the power is turned off. To do.

  First, the overall CPU 141 executes an RTC information acquisition process of acquiring RTC information from the RTC 134 of the effect control board 130 and storing it in the control RAM 145 (step S2000). The RTC information stored in the control RAM 145 is rewritten with the newly acquired RTC information every time the process of step S2000 is performed.

  Subsequent to the process in step S2000, the overall CPU 141 executes a measurement process for measuring an elapsed time since the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on (step S2100). The overall CPU 141 starts the announcement announcement effect and the new song announcement effect based on the measurement result of step S2100. This measurement process will be described in detail later based on FIG.

  Subsequent to the process of step S2100, the overall CPU 141 executes a state control process for determining whether or not the execution of the initial new song announcement effect of each new song is permitted (step S2200). This state control process will be described in detail later based on FIG.

  Subsequent to the processing in step S2200, the overall CPU 141 executes a notification effect control process for controlling the notification effect performed using the sub liquid crystal display device 6 (step S2300). The notification effect control process will be described in detail later based on FIG.

  Subsequent to the processing in step S2300, the overall CPU 141 executes the announcement notice effect control process for controlling the announcement notice effect performed prior to the new song announcement effect using the main liquid crystal display device 5 (step S2400). The announcement notice effect control process will be described in detail later with reference to FIGS. 45 and 46.

  Subsequent to the process of step S2400, the overall CPU 141 executes a new song announcement effect start process for starting a new song announcement effect performed using the main liquid crystal display device 5 (step S2500). This new song announcement effect start processing is performed separately from the game information from the game control board 100 on the main liquid crystal display device 5 that is executing the normal effect (the change effect accompanying the change display of the special symbol and the hit effect accompanying the special game). This is a process for starting the above-described new song presentation effect based on information stored in advance in the control ROM 144. The new song announcement effect start process will be described in detail later based on FIG.

  Subsequent to the process in step S2500, the overall CPU 141 executes a normal effect control process for controlling a normal effect performed using the main liquid crystal display device 5 (step S2600). This normal effect control process is a process for causing the main liquid crystal display device 5 to execute the normal effect in accordance with the game controlled by the game control board 100 based on the game information from the game control board 100. The normal effect control process will be described later in detail with reference to FIGS.

  Subsequent to the process of step S2600, the overall CPU 141 executes a new song announcement effect end process for ending the new song announcement effect started in response to the new song announcement effect start process of step S2500 (step S2700). The new song announcement effect end process will be described in detail later based on FIG.

  Following the processing in step S2700, the overall CPU 141 creates a main liquid crystal display list and / or a sub liquid crystal display list based on the results of the processing in steps S2300 to S2700, and sets them in the display list storage area 1491. Image output control processing is executed (step S2800). The image output control process will be described later in detail based on FIG.

  Subsequent to the processing in step S2800, the overall CPU 141 performs audio output control processing for outputting music, audio, and the like from the speaker 24 so as to be synchronized with the display effect performed in the main liquid crystal display device 5 or the sub liquid crystal display device 6. Execute (step S2900). This audio output control process will be described in detail later based on FIG.

  Subsequent to step S2900, the overall CPU 141 executes data transmission control processing (step S3000). Specifically, data related to image sound control performed on the image sound control board 140 is transmitted to the effect control board 130. On the other hand, the effect control board 130 transfers the data received from the image sound control board 140 to the lamp control board 150. Thereby, the frame lamp 25 and the logo accessory 7 are controlled so as to synchronize with the effects performed by the main liquid crystal display device 5, the sub liquid crystal display device 6, and the speaker 24.

[Measurement process by image acoustic control board 140]
FIG. 39 is a detailed flowchart of the measurement process in step S2100 of FIG. Subsequent to the RTC information acquisition processing in step S2000, the overall CPU 141 adds “1” to the interrupt processing count N in the image acoustic control board 140 stored in the control RAM 145 as illustrated in FIG. Update (step S2101). Every time an interrupt process is performed on the image sound control board 140, the process of step S2101 is performed, whereby the elapsed time since the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on is measured.

  Subsequent to step S2101, the overall CPU 141 determines whether it is the start time of the announcement notice effect (step S2102). Specifically, in the present embodiment, the first set time for determining whether or not it is a predetermined time before the start time of the new song presentation effect (1 minute before in this embodiment) is set to 59 minutes. Therefore, the elapsed time is calculated by multiplying the interrupt processing time interval (33 milliseconds in the present embodiment) in the image sound control board 140 by the interrupt processing count N stored in the control RAM 145 to calculate the elapsed time. It is determined whether or not it is the start time of the announcement notice effect based on whether or not the time reaches 59 minutes.

  Here, the start time of the announcement notice effect is not necessarily the time when the announcement notice effect is started, but the time when the start of the announcement notice effect is permitted. That is, the announcement announcement effect may be started immediately when the start time is reached, or may be started after, for example, 40 seconds have elapsed from the start time, depending on the execution state of the normal effect. Also, depending on the execution state of the normal effect, the announcement notice effect may not be performed. The announcement announcement effect control process for controlling such announcement announcement effect will be described in detail later.

  If the overall CPU 141 determines that it is the start time of the announcement announcement effect (step S2102: YES), the overall CPU 141 sets the announcement announcement flag stored in the control RAM 145 to “ON” (step S2103). This announcement notice flag is a flag indicating whether or not the start time of the announcement notice effect is reached, and is set to “ON” when the start time of the announcement notice effect is reached, and “OFF” when the new song announcement effect is started. Set to

  When the overall CPU 141 executes the process of step S2103, or determines that it is not the start time of the announcement announcement effect (step S2102: NO), the overall CPU 141 determines whether it is the start time of the new song announcement effect (step S2104). ). Specifically, in the present embodiment, since the second set time for determining whether or not it is the start time of the new song presentation effect is set to 1 hour, the same method as the process of step S2102 is performed. Based on whether or not the calculated elapsed time has reached 1 hour, it is determined whether or not it is the start time of the new song announcement effect. If it is determined that it is not the start time of the new song announcement effect (step S2104: NO), the process proceeds to the state control process of step S2200.

  If the overall CPU 141 determines that it is the start time of the new song announcement effect (step S2104: YES), the overall CPU 141 sets the new song announcement flag stored in the control RAM 145 to “ON” (step S2105). Here, the new song announcement flag is a flag indicating whether or not the start time of the new song announcement effect is reached, and is set to “ON” when the start time of the new song announcement effect is reached, and “OFF” when the new song announcement effect is started. "Is set.

  In this way, the overall CPU 141 has a second set time (1 hour in the present embodiment) that defines the elapsed time during measurement and the start timing of the new song presentation effect, regardless of the various commands transmitted from the game control board 100. The start timing of the new song announcement effect is determined based on whether or not it has become, and the new song announcement effect is started on the main liquid crystal display device 5 and the speaker 24 by setting the new song announcement flag to “ON” at the determined start timing. Let The new song announcement effect start control process for starting this new song announcement effect will be described in detail later.

  Subsequent to step S2105, the overall CPU 141 resets the interrupt processing count N stored in the control RAM 145 (step S2106). As described above, in the present embodiment, when the elapsed time measured by repeating the processing of step S2101 reaches 1 hour, the elapsed time is measured again after the interrupt processing count N is returned to “0”. . For this reason, a new song announcement effect is executed every hour.

  In the present embodiment, the case where the second set time is set to 1 hour has been described, but the second set time may be a time other than 1 hour. Also, the second setting time is not necessarily one, and for example, different second setting times may be set according to the type of new song used for the new song announcement effect. By adopting this configuration, the time interval at which the new song announcement effect is performed can be made different for each new song. Also, the first set time may be a time other than 59 minutes.

  Subsequent to step S2106, the overall CPU 141 determines whether or not all songs are released (step S2107). Specifically, since the first new song announcement effect of the new song L that will be announced at the end will be performed on September 29, 2012 (see FIG. 40), the entire song will be released on September 29, the same year. Then, it is determined whether or not the current date indicated by the RTC information acquired from the RTC 134 is a date after September 29, which is the start date of the transition to the all songs release state. Here, when it is determined that the state is not the all-music release state (step S2107: NO), the process proceeds to the state control process of step S2200.

  If the overall CPU 141 determines that all songs are released (step S2107: YES), the overall CPU 141 updates the reset processing count P stored in the control RAM 145 to a value obtained by adding “1” (step S2108). The reset processing count P indicates the number of times the reset processing in step S2106 has been performed. In the present embodiment, since the process of step S2106 is performed every time one hour has elapsed with respect to the time when the power is turned on, the reset process count P is equal to the pachinko machine at the timing when the reset process count P is updated. 1 is the same as the elapsed time from the power-on. For this reason, for example, if the reset processing count P is “1”, it can be determined that one hour has elapsed since the power was turned on, and if it is “2”, it can be determined that two hours have elapsed. . The number P of reset processing is used in the new song announcement effect start process in step S2500 in order to determine the type of new song used for the new song announcement effect that starts every hour in the state where all songs are released.

[Public Management Table]
FIG. 40 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the public management table. As illustrated in FIG. 40, the release management table includes a new song type indicating the type of new song, an initial announcement date that is the date of the first new song announcement effect, and an initial announcement of the new song corresponding to the first announcement date. An initial announcement permission time that is a time to shift to a state in which the execution of the effect is permitted is stored in association with each new song.

  For example, for the new song A, it is prescribed that the internal state relating to the new song announcement effect is shifted to the announcement permission state at 12:00 (noon) on July 7, 2012, and then the first new song announcement effect of the new song A is started. Has been. Also, for example, for new song B, at 12 o'clock (noon) on July 14, 2012, the internal state related to the new song announcement effect is shifted to the announcement permission state, and then the first new song announcement effect of new song B is started. Is stipulated. In this embodiment, since the new song announcement flag is set to “ON” every hour based on the power-on of the pachinko gaming machine 1, the new song A is allowed to be released at 12:00 on July 7, 2012. From 1 to July 12 of the same year, when the new song B is permitted to be released, the new song announcement effect of the new song A is repeated every hour on the basis of the power-on. This is the same for the new songs B to L, except that the periods in which the presentation is permitted are different.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 in the present embodiment uses a normal effect and an announcement notice effect, which are performed using the main liquid crystal display device 5, and the sub liquid crystal display device 6 when the first new song announcement effect is performed. It has the feature that the production contents of the announcement production to be performed change.

  For example, when the first new song announcement effect of the new song A is performed, the effect contents of each effect change as follows. That is, as illustrated in FIG. 40, as the background image displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 5, only the default background image appeared until the first new song announcement effect of the new song A was performed. After the first new song announcement effect is performed, a new song A background image created using image data related to the new song A appears. The same applies to new songs after the new song B.

  Also, at the opening of the long hit game, the default opening production was performed until the first new song announcement production of the new song A, but the first new song of the new song B after the first new song announcement production of the new song A Until the presentation effect is performed, an opening effect using image data and sound data related to the new song A is performed. The same applies to the ending effect of the long hit game. In this way, the opening effect and the ending effect in the long hit game are fixed to those based on the new song used for the current new song announcement effect until the first new song announcement effect of the next new song is performed. . That is, for example, after the first new song announcement effect of the new song C is performed until the first new song announcement effect of the new song D is performed, the opening effect and the ending effect of the new song C specification are performed.

  In addition, in the selection of the music to be played in the 15R long hit game, only the default music can be selected until the first new song announcement effect of the new song A, but the first new song announcement effect of the new song A is performed. After that, the new song A can be selected. The same applies to new songs after the new song B, and every time the first new song announcement effect is performed, new songs that can be selected by the player in the song selection increase. For this reason, for example, the first new song announcement of the new song L is the only song that can be selected for the first week after the initial announcement of the new song B is performed, the default song, the new song A, and the new song B. After the performance is performed, it is possible to select a default song and 13 songs including the new songs A to L.

  Also, since the announcement announcement effect was not performed until the start of the first new song announcement production of the new song A, the document video of the new song A is played from immediately before the start of the new song A until the start of the first new song announcement production of the new song B The announcement announcement effect to be performed is executed prior to the new song announcement effect every time a new song announcement effect for the new song A is performed. The same applies to new songs after the new song G. When a new song announcement effect is performed, an announcement announcement effect corresponding to the new song used for the new song announcement effect is performed.

  In addition, a new song announcement effect for the new song A is performed every hour for one week after the first song announcement effect for the new song A is performed, and a new song announcement effect for the new song B is performed after one week. For this reason, during the period from when the first new song announcement effect of the new song A is performed until the first new song announcement effect of the new song B is performed, the sub liquid crystal display device 6 performs a notice effect regarding the new song announcement effect of the new song A (for example, FIG. 9). (See (C)), or a notification effect (see FIG. 9D) regarding the new song announcement effect of the new song B is performed. The same applies to new songs after the new song C.

  Up to this point, how the production changes with the first new song announcement production has been briefly described. However, in this embodiment, the change in the production is a display list creation table (used to create a display list ( This is realized by switching (see FIG. 37).

  In this embodiment, the case where the intervals from the first announcement date to the first announcement date of the next new song are all set to one week will be described, but this interval may be an interval other than one week, Multiple types of intervals may be set. In this embodiment, the case where the initial announcement permission time is unified at 12:00 for all new songs will be described, but a different initial announcement permission time may be set for each new song. Also, the order of announcement of new songs may be in the order of announcement other than the order of announcement illustrated in the disclosure management table.

[State Control Processing by Image Sound Control Board 140]
FIG. 41 is a detailed flowchart of the state control process in step S2200 of FIG. Subsequent to the measurement process in step S2100, the overall CPU 141 determines whether or not all songs are in the open state, similar to the process in step S2107 (step S2201). Here, if it is determined that all songs are in an open state (step S2201: YES), the process proceeds to the notification effect control process in step S2300.

  If the overall CPU 141 determines that all songs are not open (step S2201: NO), it determines whether the current date is the first new song announcement date (step S2202). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the current date indicated by the RTC information coincides with any of the initial announcement dates of the new songs A to L defined in the disclosure management table. Here, when it is determined that it is not the first new song announcement date (step S2202: NO), that is, when it is not the first announcement date of any new song, the process proceeds to the notification effect control process in step S2300.

  If the overall CPU 141 determines that it is the first new song announcement date (step S2202: YES), the overall CPU 141 determines whether or not the current time is the first announcement permission time (step S2203). Specifically, the initial announcement permission time corresponding to the current date corresponding to the first announcement date of any new song is read from the disclosure management table, and the current time indicated by the RTC information is the read first announcement permission time. Determine whether or not. In this embodiment, since the initial announcement permission time is set to 12:00 for all new songs, it is determined in this step S2203 whether or not the time indicated by the RTC information is 12:00. Become. If it is determined in step S2203 that the first presentation permission time has not come (step S2203: NO), the process proceeds to the notification effect control process in step S2300.

  If the overall CPU 141 determines that the first presentation permission time has come (step S2203: YES), the overall CPU 141 sets the presentation permission flag stored in the control RAM 145 to “ON” (step S2204). This announcement permission flag is a flag indicating whether or not the announcement permission state is set to permit execution of the first new song announcement effect of the new song to be released next to the currently released new song, and is specified in the release management table. Is set to “ON” when the first announcement permission time is reached, and is set to “OFF” when the new song presentation effect is started in the state set to “ON”.

[Presentation permission status]
FIG. 42 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a presentation permission state. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to this embodiment, as described above, the elapsed time is measured with reference to the time when the power is turned on. Therefore, assuming that the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on around 8:00 am and the pachinko hall opens at 10:00 am, for example, regarding the first new song announcement effect of the new song A, on July 7, which is the first announcement date, The number of reset processes in step S2106 (see FIG. 39) is counted, and the first new song announcement effect of the new song A is triggered when the counted number reaches “4” (4 hours have passed since the power was turned on). By adopting the configuration of starting, it is possible to perform the first new song announcement effect of the new song A around 12:00 (noon) (see FIG. 42A).

  However, this configuration causes the following problems. That is, as illustrated in FIG. 42 (B), when the hall clerk turns on the power at around 5 am, the first new song of new song A at around 9 am before 10:00 am when the pachinko hall opens. As a result, there is a problem that the player cannot enjoy the first new song announcement effect of the new song A, which is a trigger for newly appearing various effects related to the new song A. In addition, the same problem may occur when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is still powered on from the day before the first announcement date.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, the presentation permission flag is set to “ON” on the condition that the current time indicated by the RTC information is a preset time (first presentation permission time), and the presentation permission flag is “ON”. When the new song announcement flag is set to “ON” while the new song announcement flag is set to “ON” and the new song announcement flag is set to “ON” while the announcement permission flag is set to “OFF” Adopts a configuration in which the first new song announcement effect is not executed (if there is a new song that has already been released, the new song announcement effect is executed for the new song).

  With this configuration, as illustrated in FIG. 42C, even if the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on at around 5 am, which is different from the assumption, around 12:00 (exactly after 12:00) First, when the new song announcement flag is turned “ON”, the first new song announcement effect of the new song A can be started. Such control of the announcement permission state is similarly performed for new songs other than the new song A.

[Announcement order management table]
FIG. 43 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the presentation order management table. The presentation order management table is a table for managing the types of new songs used for new song announcement effects in the state where all songs are open. In the presentation order management table, as shown in FIG. 43, for each date after 9/29, which is the first day of the release of all songs, the elapsed time since the power-on of the pachinko machine 1 and the new song announcement effect are used. The type of new song to be played is associated. In the present embodiment, a case where the presentation order management table is configured assuming that the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on around 8:00 am will be described as an example.

  When all songs are released, the period during which new song announcement effects are performed for each song is shortened from one week to one hour. As a result, the new song announcement effects of the new songs A to L performed over 84 days (= 1 week × 12 songs) before all songs are released will be performed in one day.

  For example, if the power is turned on at about 8:00 am on September 29, the new song A will be announced at about 10 am two hours later, and the new song B will be produced at about 11 am three hours later. A new song announcement effect is performed, and a new song announcement effect for new song C is performed around 12:00 four hours later. Then, 11 hours later, around 19:00, the new song J will be announced. Around 12 hours later, the new song K will be announced. Around 13 hours later, the new song L will be announced around 21:00. Presentation presentation will be held.

  By the way, after September 30th, if the new song announcement production is performed on the same schedule as September 29th, the game will continue from the opening to the closing of the pachinko hall no matter what day the player plays. If so, you can enjoy new song announcements for all new songs. However, there are some players who can only play during a specific time period. On the other hand, if a new song is produced with the same schedule as described above, even if you continue to play every day, The problem of not being able to enjoy the new song announcement production of all new songs arises. For example, on September 29, when a player starts playing at about 18:00, he can enjoy the new song announcement effect of new song I to new song L, but cannot enjoy the new song announcement effect of new song A to new song H. .

  For this reason, in this embodiment, as illustrated in FIG. 43, the song order of the new songs is defined in advance so that the song order of the new songs used for the new song announcement effect is regularly shifted one by one. Yes. For this reason, for example, new song announcement effects for new song A and new song B, which could only be enjoyed in the morning of September 29, will be performed after 18:00 on October 1. Therefore, as described above, even a player who can play only in a specific time zone can enjoy the new song announcement effects of all new songs by continuing to go to the pachinko hall to some extent. The control of the new song announcement effect in such a state where all songs are released will be described in detail later based on FIG.

[Notification effect control processing by image sound control board 140]
FIG. 44 is a detailed flowchart of the notification effect control process in step S2300 of FIG. The notification effect control process is a process for controlling the notification effect performed using the sub liquid crystal display device 6.

  Subsequent to the state control process in step S2200, the overall CPU 141 determines whether or not all songs are released as in the process in step S2107 as illustrated in FIG. 44 (step S2301). If it is determined that all songs are in an open state (step S2301: YES), the specific process for executing the notice effect is not performed, and the process proceeds to the announcement notice effect control process of step S2400. This is illustrated in FIG. 9 because, in the state where all songs are open, new song announcement effects are performed every hour, the new songs used each time are switched, and there are no unreleased new songs. This is because it is not always necessary to perform a notice presentation.

  If the overall CPU 141 determines that all songs are not open (step S2301: NO), for example, based on the processing status of the VDP 142, the overall CPU 141 determines whether or not a new song presentation effect is being executed (step S2302). If it is determined that the new song announcement effect is not being executed (step S2302: NO), for example, based on the processing status of the VDP 142, a notification effect including a countdown display of the remaining time until the new song announcement effect is started ( It is determined whether or not the process shown in FIG. 9C is being executed (step S2303). If it is determined that the notification effect including the countdown display is being executed (step S2303: YES), the process proceeds to the announcement notice effect control process in step S2400.

  If the overall CPU 141 determines that the announcement effect including the countdown display is not being executed (step S2303: NO), for example, based on the interrupt processing count N counted up in the process of step S2101, the start time of the new song presentation effect It is determined whether or not it is a predetermined time before the time (for example, 15 minutes before) (step S2304).

  If the overall CPU 141 determines that it is a predetermined time ago (step S2304: YES), it sets setting information (including information indicating the remaining time) for causing the sub liquid crystal display device 6 to start a notification effect including a countdown display. It is set in the control RAM 145 (step S2305). The display list for the sub liquid crystal is created based on this setting information and stored in the display list storage area 1491, so that the title of the new song to be announced is notified and the new song announcement effect of the new song is started. The remaining time is counted down (see FIG. 9C).

  If the overall CPU 141 determines that it is not a predetermined time before the new song announcement effect (step S2304: NO), the overall CPU 141 executes the following processing in order to perform a notice effect related to the new song released next to the latest song at the current time. . That is, the overall CPU 141 determines whether or not it is the first new song release date, similarly to the process of step S2202 (see FIG. 41) (step S2306).

  If the overall CPU 141 determines that it is not the first new song release date (step S2306: NO), the general CPU 141 provides a notification effect including an effect to notify the remaining days until the first release date of the next new song to be released to the sub liquid crystal display device 6. Setting information for execution is set in the control RAM 145 (step S2307). Specifically, first, the current date is specified based on the RTC information. Then, with reference to the public management table (see FIG. 40), the first announcement date that is later than the current date and closest to the current date is specified. The first announcement date specified in this way is the first announcement date of the next new song to be released. For example, if the current date is July 6, 2012, the initial announcement date that meets the above-mentioned conditions is July 7, 2012, and the next new song to be released is the new song A. Can do. When the general CPU 141 identifies the first announcement date in this way, the overall CPU 141 calculates the number of days from the current date to the identified first announcement date. In the example described here, the number of days “1” is calculated. In this way, the overall CPU 141 acquires the type of new song to be released next (the song name here) and the number of days until the first new song announcement effect of the new song is performed based on the RTC information and the disclosure management table. To do. And the setting information of the notification effect corresponding to these acquired information is set. A display list for the sub liquid crystal is created based on this setting information and stored in the display list storage area 1491 so that the title of the new song to be released next and the remaining days until the first announcement date of the new song are notified. (See FIG. 9A).

  If the overall CPU 141 determines that it is the first new song announcement date (step S2306: YES), the general CPU 141 causes the sub liquid crystal display device 6 to execute a notification effect including an effect that informs that an unreleased new song announcement will be made today. Setting information is set in the control RAM 145 (step S2308). Specifically, the processing is performed in the same manner as in step S2306 described above, the type (song name) of a new song to be released next is acquired, and notification setting information corresponding to this information is set. Based on this setting information, a display list for the sub liquid crystal is created and stored in the display list storage area 1491 so that the title of the unreleased song and the new song announcement effect of the unreleased song will be announced today. (See FIG. 9B).

  On the other hand, if the overall CPU 141 determines that the new song announcement effect is being executed (step S2302: YES), for example, based on the processing status of the VDP 142, the overall CPU 141 determines whether or not the new song announcement effect has ended (step S2310). . If it is determined that the new song announcement effect has not ended (step S2310: NO), the process proceeds to the announcement notice effect control process in step S2400.

  When determining that the new song announcement effect has ended (step S2310: YES), the overall CPU 141 determines whether the completed new song announcement effect is the first new song announcement effect (step S2311). Specifically, since the announcement permission flag is set to “ON” at the start of the first new song announcement effect, based on whether the announcement permission flag was set to “ON” at the start of the new song announcement effect, It is determined whether or not it is the first new song announcement effect. Here, when it is determined that it is not the first new song announcement effect (step S2311: NO), the process proceeds to the announcement notice effect control process in step S2400.

  If the overall CPU 141 determines that it is the first new song announcement effect (step S2311: YES), for example, referring to the announcement management table, identifies the new song to be released next, and until the first song announcement effect of the new song is performed. Setting information for causing the sub liquid crystal display device 6 to execute a notification effect including an effect of notifying the remaining days (7 days regardless of the type of the new song in this embodiment) is set in the control RAM 145 (step S2312). The display list for the sub liquid crystal is created based on this setting information and stored in the display list storage area 1491, so that the title of the unreleased song and the number of days until the first announcement of the unreleased song is made. Notification is made (see FIG. 9D).

  In the present embodiment, the case where the sub liquid crystal display device 6 is used only for the notification effect has been described. However, for example, the sub liquid crystal display device 6 performs an effect synchronized with the effect performed in the main liquid crystal display device 5. Thus, you may use the sub liquid crystal display device 6 for uses other than notification production.

[Presentation notice effect control processing by image sound control board 140]
45 and 46 are detailed flowcharts of the announcement / notice effect control process in step S2400 of FIG. Subsequent to the notification effect control process in step S2300, the overall CPU 141 determines whether or not the announcement notice flag stored in the control RAM 145 is set to “ON” as illustrated in FIG. 45 ( Step S2401). The announcement notice flag is set to “ON” by performing the above-described step S2103 (see FIG. 39). If it is determined that the announcement notice flag is not set to “ON” (step S2401: NO), the process proceeds to the new song announcement effect start process in step S2500.

  When determining that the announcement notice flag is set to “ON” (step S2401: YES), the overall CPU 141 controls setting information related to the announcement notice effect according to the announcement notice flag being set to “ON”. It is determined whether or not the process of setting in the RAM 145 has been completed (step S2402). If it is determined that the process for setting the setting information has been completed (step S2402: YES), the process proceeds to the new song presentation effect start process in step S2500.

  If the overall CPU 141 determines that the process of setting the setting information has not been completed (step S2402: NO), for example, based on the reception status of the command related to the special game from the effect control board 130, the general CPU 141 is in the special game. It is determined whether or not (step S2403). Here, if it is determined that the special game is not being played (step S2403: NO), it is determined whether or not the customer waiting effect is being performed (step S2404). Specifically, since the customer waiting effect is performed after the customer waiting effect start command is received from the effect control board 130 until the variable effect start command is received, for example, the customer waiting effect start command is received. After that, based on whether or not the change production start command is received, it is determined whether or not the customer waiting production is being performed (step S2404).

  By the way, during the customer waiting effect, the normal effect accompanying the game using the game ball is not performed. For this reason, even if the announcement notice effect unrelated to the normal effect is performed, there is no risk of impairing the interest of the normal effect. For this reason, when it is determined that the customer waiting effect is being performed (step S2404: YES), the overall CPU 141 identifies a new song to be announced in the new song announcement effect (step S2405). Specifically, the current date and time (date and time) is specified based on the RTC information, and the start time of the new song announcement effect that is performed following the announcement announcement effect of this time is specified based on the specified current date and time. More specifically, the current interrupt processing count N is subtracted from the interrupt processing count N when the new song release flag is set to “ON”, and the value obtained by this subtraction is used as the interrupt processing time interval (this implementation In the embodiment, the remaining time until the start time of the new song announcement effect is calculated by multiplying by 33 mm). Then, the start time of the new song announcement effect is specified by adding the remaining time calculated to the specified current date and time. When specifying the start time of the new song announcement effect, the overall CPU 141 specifies a new song used for the new song announcement effect with reference to the table. That is, when the current state is not the state of releasing all songs, the public management table (see FIG. 40) is referred to and it is determined which new song is used at the start time of the specified new song announcement effect. On the other hand, when the current state is the all-music release state, it is determined which new song is used at the start time of the specified new song announcement effect with reference to the presentation order management table (see FIG. 43).

  Subsequent to the processing in step S2405, the overall CPU 141 sets setting information for starting the announcement notice effect relating to the specified new song in the control RAM 145 (step S2406). When the setting information is set, a display list for the main liquid crystal is created based on the setting information, and the created display list is stored in the display list storage area 1491. As a result, the announcement notice effect is started.

  In this way, when the general CPU 141 is in a waiting-for-customer effect at a predetermined time (1 minute in this embodiment) before the start time of the new song announcement effect, that is, when the start time of the announcement notice effect is reached, Immediately start the announcement notice.

  On the other hand, if the overall CPU 141 determines that it is not during the customer waiting effect (step S2404: NO), for example, the elapsed time since receiving the change effect start command instructing the start of the normal effect accompanying the change display of the special symbol. Based on, it is determined whether or not the special symbol variation display is in progress (step S2407).

  If the overall CPU 141 determines that the special symbol variation display is in progress (step S2407: YES), the development start flag, the prohibition flag, and the post-end start flag stored in the control RAM 145 are displayed. It is determined whether or not the flag setting process has been completed based on whether or not “ON” is set (step S2408). These three flags will be described later.

  If the overall CPU 141 determines that the flag setting process has not been completed (step S2408: NO), that is, if all of the above three flags are set to “OFF”, the current special symbol variation display ends. The remaining time until this is calculated (step S2409). Specifically, for example, the variation time of the special symbol is specified based on the variation effect start command received from the effect control board 130, and the elapsed time from the reception of the variation effect start command to the current time is specified. The remaining time is calculated by subtracting.

  By the way, if the variation effect accompanying the change display of the special symbol ends before the start time of the new song announcement effect, the end timing of the end of the current variation effect or the change effect accompanying the change display of the next special symbol starts. The switching timing of the variation effect such as the start timing to be performed exists before the start time of the new song announcement effect. In such a case, if the announcement notice effect is started at the end timing or the start timing, it is possible to suppress the interest of the changing effect from being impaired by the announcement notice effect.

  For this reason, the overall CPU 141 determines whether or not the time obtained by adding the remaining time calculated to the current time is the time before the start time of the new song presentation effect following the process of step S2409. It is determined whether or not the variation effect being executed with the special symbol variation display ends before the new song announcement effect is started (step S2410). If it is determined that the new song announcement effect is to be ended before the start (step S2410: YES), the post-end start flag is set to “ON” (step S2411). The after-start flag is a flag indicating whether or not the announcement notice effect is to be started after the change effect accompanying the change display of the special symbol this time is ended. For this reason, when the start flag after the end is set to “ON”, the announcement notice effect is started at the timing when the current variation effect ends or when the next variation effect starts.

  On the other hand, if the overall CPU 141 determines that the variation effect accompanying the variation display of the special symbol this time is not finished before the new song announcement effect is started (step S2410: NO), the new song announcement effect is started. It is determined whether or not there is a development timing in the variation effect before (step S2412). Specifically, the variation production start command received from the production control board 130 is analyzed, and there is a development timing such as development from normal reach to super reach, for example, in the variation production being executed along with the special symbol variation display. Determine whether or not. When it is determined that the development timing exists, it is determined whether or not the time corresponding to the development timing is before the start time of the specified new song announcement effect.

  By the way, in order to prevent the announcement announcement effect from deteriorating the interest of the variation effect accompanying the change display of the special symbol this time, it is preferable to start the announcement announcement effect after the variation effect ends. However, if such a configuration is adopted when the variation effect accompanying the variation display of this special symbol does not end before the new song announcement effect starts, the announcement notice effect will be performed during the new song announcement effect. The problem arises. For this reason, it is preferable not to perform the announcement announcement effect when the variation effect accompanying the variation display of the special symbol this time is not finished before the new song announcement effect is started. On the other hand, if the variation effect of one time performed from the start to the end of the special symbol variation display has the development timing, that is, the switching timing of the production, the variation production at the development timing. If the image is switched to the reduced display and the announcement announcement effect is started, it is possible to prevent the announcement announcement effect from damaging the interest of the variation effect.

  Therefore, if the general CPU 141 determines that there is a development timing in the variation production before the new song announcement production is started (step S2412: YES), the general CPU 141 sets the development start flag to “ON” (step S2413). . Here, the development start flag is a flag indicating whether or not the announcement notice effect is to be started at the development timing of the effect in the variable effect.

  On the other hand, if the general CPU 141 determines that there is no development timing in the variable production before the new song announcement effect is started (step S2412: NO), the general CPU 141 starts from the start time of the announcement announcement effect until the start time of the new song announcement effect Since there is no timing for switching the variation effect between them, the prohibition flag is set to “ON” in order to prevent the announcement announcement effect from being performed and the interest of the variation effect from being impaired (step S2414). Here, the prohibition flag is a flag indicating whether or not the execution of the announcement notice effect is prohibited.

  The overall CPU 141 executes the process of step S2411, executes the process of step S2413, executes the process of step S2414, or determines that the flag setting process has been completed (step S2408: YES). Then, it is determined whether or not the prohibition flag is set to “ON” (step S2417). If it is determined that the prohibition flag is set to “ON” (step S2417: YES), the process proceeds to the new song presentation effect start process in step S2500. As described above, when the prohibition flag is set to “ON”, the process cannot proceed to the above-described steps S2405 and S2406, so that the announcement notice effect is not performed.

  On the other hand, when determining that the prohibition flag is not set to “ON” (step S2417: NO), the overall CPU 141 determines whether the development start flag is set to “ON” (step S2418). . If it is determined that the development start flag is not set to “ON” (step S2418: NO), the process proceeds to the new song announcement effect start process in step S2500.

  If the overall CPU 141 determines that the development start flag is set to “ON” (step S2418: YES), it becomes the development timing based on the analysis result of the variable production start command related to the current normal production. It is determined whether or not (step S2419). If it is determined that the development timing is not reached (step S2419: NO), the process proceeds to the new song announcement effect start process in step S2500.

  If the overall CPU 141 determines that the development timing has come (step S2419: YES), the overall CPU 141 executes the processes of steps S2405 and S2406 described above.

  As described above, the overall CPU 141 specifies the development timing of the dynamic effect (effect switching timing) based on the variable effect start command received from the effect control board 130, and determines that it is the start time of the announcement notice effect. The announcement announcement effect in the upper area is started at the specified development timing before the start time of the new song announcement effect.

  On the other hand, after the current special symbol variation display is completed, the following processing is performed. That is, if the overall CPU 141 determines that the special symbol variation display is not being performed (step S2407: NO), the overall CPU 141 determines whether or not the after-start flag is set to “ON” (step S2421). If it is determined that the after-start flag is not set to “ON” (step S2421: NO), the process proceeds to the new song announcement effect start process in step S2500.

  If the overall CPU 141 determines that the after-start flag is set to “ON” (step S2421: YES), for example, based on the reception status of the hold display command and the variable effect start command from the effect control board 130, It is determined whether or not the first special symbol determination is suspended (step S2422). If it is determined that the first special symbol determination is not suspended (step S2422: NO), it is determined whether or not a variable effect end command is received from the effect control board 130 (step S2423). Here, if it is determined that the variation effect end command has not been received (step S2423: NO), the process proceeds to the new song announcement effect start process in step S2500.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the variable effect end command has been received (step S2423: YES), the process proceeds to step S2405 and step S2406 described above. When the first special symbol determination is not suspended at the end of the variation effect accompanying the variation display of the special symbol this time, the end timing of the variation effect associated with the variation display of the special symbol this time is the switching timing of the effect. For this reason, in such a case, the announcement announcement effect is started at the timing when the variation effect accompanying the variation display of the special symbol this time ends.

  If the overall CPU 141 determines that the first special symbol determination is suspended (step S2422: YES), the overall CPU 141 determines whether or not a variable effect start command is received from the effect control board 130 (step S2424). Here, if it is determined that the variation effect start command has not been received (step S2424: NO), the process proceeds to the new song announcement effect start process of step S2500.

  By the way, when the variation effect start command is received immediately after the variation effect accompanying the variation display of the special symbol is completed, the variation effect accompanying the variation display of the next special symbol is started accordingly. . For this reason, the timing at which the variation display of the special symbol is started after the variation display of the special symbol is finished, that is, the timing at which the next variation effect is started in response to the variation effect start command is also the switching timing of the effect. Become. For this reason, when the overall CPU 141 determines that the change effect start command has been received (step S2424: YES), the overall CPU 141 executes the processes of steps S2405 and S2406 described above.

  As described above, when the special symbol is variably displayed at the start time of the announcement notice effect, the overall CPU 141 causes the main liquid crystal display device 5 to start the announcement notice effect after the variability display ends.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the special game is being played (step S2403: YES), the overall CPU 141 determines whether or not the long game is being played as illustrated in FIG. 46 (step S2426). When a long winning game is performed, an opening effect start command, an in-round effect start command, and an ending effect start command are transmitted from the effect control board 130 as commands for instructing the execution of the hit effect accompanying the long win game. On the other hand, when a short hit game is performed, a short hit effect start command and a short hit effect end command are transmitted from the effect control board 130. For this reason, the overall CPU 141 determines whether or not the long hit game is being executed based on which command of these commands is being executed.

  If the overall CPU 141 determines that a long game is being played (step S2426: YES), the overall CPU 141 determines whether it is before the start of the final round (step S2427). Here, when it is determined that it is not before the start of the final round (step S2427: NO), the process proceeds to step S2435 described later.

  By the way, during a long hit game, an in-round effect start command is transmitted from the effect control board 130 every time a long open round game is started, and an in-round effect is performed for each round. In the in-round effect, at least a part of the display content (for example, a display indicating the current number of rounds) is updated each time the in-round effect start command is received by the image sound control board 140. In other words, every time the effect start command during round is received by the image sound control board 140, the hit effect accompanying the long hit game is switched.

  Therefore, if the overall CPU 141 determines that it is before the start of the final round (step S2427: YES), it determines whether or not an in-round effect start command has been received from the effect control board 130 (step S2428). If it is determined that the in-round production start command has not been received (step S2428: NO), the process proceeds to the new song announcement production start process in step S2500.

  On the other hand, when determining that the command for starting the production during the round has been received (step S2428: YES), the overall CPU 141 identifies a new song to be announced in the new song announcement production (step S2429), and announces the announcement regarding the identified new song. Setting information for starting the effect is set in the control RAM 145 (step S2430). The processes in steps S2429 and S2430 are performed in the same manner as the processes in steps S2405 and S2406 described above.

  As described above, the general CPU 141 causes the main liquid crystal display device 5 to start the announcement announcement effect after the completion of the long release round game when the start announcement announcement time is reached during the long release round game. In the present embodiment, the case where the announcement announcement effect is started at the timing when the next long release round game is started after the long release round game being executed at the start time of the announcement announcement effect is described. For example, the announcement announcement effect may be started at the timing when the long open round game being executed ends at the start time of the announcement announcement effect.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 47, a description will be given of the relationship between the time for activating the announcement notice effect and the time required for the long open round game. In the present embodiment, the activation time, which is the time from the start time of the announcement announcement effect to the start time of the new song announcement effect, is set to 1 minute. On the other hand, as illustrated in FIG. 47A, if the activation time is set to 20 seconds, the in-round effect that is being executed when the announcement notice effect start time is reached, It may end after the start time of the new song announcement effect. That is, since there is no timing for switching the hit effect accompanying the long hit game in the activation time, if the announcement announcement effect is started somewhere in the activation time, the interest of the hit effect is surely lost.

  On the other hand, in this embodiment, the activation time of the announcement notice effect is set to a time sufficiently longer than the time required for digesting one long open round game (up to 29 seconds). In other words, the activation time of the announcement notice effect is set to a time longer than the longest time during which the effect during one round is executed. For this reason, as illustrated in FIG. 47 (B), the in-round effect that is being executed when the start time of the announcement notice effect ends is finished before the start time of the new song announcement effect, and the next round Production will be started during the round. In this embodiment, since the announcement announcement effect is started at the start of the production during the round, the announcement announcement effect can be started without impairing the interest of the new song announcement effect.

  By the way, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the present embodiment, the music selected by the player may be played during the long hit game. When the announcement announcement effect or the new song announcement effect is started during the reproduction of such music, it is necessary to stop the reproduction of the music. However, if the player selects a desired piece of music but that piece of music is not played to the end, the player may feel uncomfortable. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the announcement announcement effect or the new song announcement effect is started during the reproduction of the song, the reproduction of the song is stopped and the reproduction of the song is restarted from the beginning after the new song announcement effect is finished. I am going to do that. In order to realize such control, the following processing is performed following the processing in step S2430.

  That is, following step S2430, the overall CPU 141 determines whether or not the selected music piece is being played based on, for example, whether or not the VDP 142 is performing a drawing process related to the music piece playback (step S2430). S2431). If it is determined that the music is not being played back (step S2431: NO), the process proceeds to the new song announcement effect start process in step S2500.

  If the overall CPU 141 determines that the music is being played back (step S2431: YES), the overall CPU 141 causes the VDP 142 and the sound DSP 143 to stop playing the music (step S2432). Then, music information that can specify the type of the music for which playback has been stopped is stored in the control RAM 145 (step S2433), and the replay flag stored in the control RAM 145 is set to “ON” (step S2434). The replay flag is a flag indicating whether or not to start playing the music corresponding to the music information after the new song announcement effect is finished.

  By the way, when it is the start time of the announcement notice effect after the last round in the long hit game, the processing to change the in-round effect is received before the end of the long hit game is received. There is no. For this reason, in such a case, the announcement announcement effect is started at the timing when the ending of the long hit game is completed.

  Further, the short win effect associated with the short hit game is a series from the start of the short hit game to the end of the ending, and there is no switch timing of the output in the middle. For this reason, when it becomes the start time of the announcement notice effect during the short hit game, the announcement notice effect is started at the timing when the ending of the short hit game ends.

  For this reason, when the general CPU 141 determines that the game is not long hit (step S2426: NO), and determines that it is not before the final round (step S2427: NO), for example, an ending effect start command (or short hit) It is determined whether or not the ending of the long hit game (or short hit game) has ended based on the elapsed time since the reception of the effect end command) (step S2435). If it is determined that the ending has not ended (step S2435: NO), the process proceeds to the new song announcement effect start process in step S2500. Conversely, if it is determined that the ending has ended (step S2435: YES), the process proceeds to step S2429, and the announcement notice effect is started.

  As described above, when the start time of the announcement announcement effect is reached after the long release round game of the last round in the long hit game is started, the announcement announcement effect is started after the end of the long release round game is ended. In addition, if it becomes the start time of the announcement announcement effect during the short opening round game in the short hit game, the announcement announcement effect is performed after all the short opening round games executed continuously with this short opening round game are completed. Let it begin.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 48, the relationship between the time of the announcement notice effect and the time required for the short hit game will be described. In the present embodiment, the activation time related to the announcement notice effect is set to 1 minute. On the other hand, as illustrated in FIG. 48 (A), if the activation time is set to 20 seconds, the short hit effect that is being executed when the announcement notice effect start time is reached, It will end after the start time of the new song announcement production. In other words, since there is no timing for switching the short win effect associated with the short hit game in the trigger time, if the announcement notice effect is started somewhere in the trigger time, the interest of the hit effect is surely lost. .

  On the other hand, in this embodiment, the activation time of the announcement notice effect is set to a time sufficiently longer than the time (for example, 30 seconds) required to digest one short hit game. In other words, the activation time of the announcement notice effect is set to a time sufficiently longer than the total time required to digest a plurality of consecutive (15 times in this embodiment) short open round games. For this reason, as illustrated in FIG. 48 (B), the short hit effect that is being executed when the start time of the announcement notice effect ends is finished before the start time of the new song announcement effect. And in this embodiment, since the announcement notice effect is started with the start of the variable symbol display that has been resumed after the short win effect associated with the short win game is ended, the interest of the win effect and the variable effect is impaired. The announcement notice effect can be started without any problem.

[New song presentation effect start processing by image sound control board 140]
FIG. 49 is a detailed flowchart of the new song announcement effect start process in step S2500 of FIG. Subsequent to the announcement announcement effect control process in step S2400, the overall CPU 141 determines whether or not the new song announcement flag is set to “ON” as illustrated in FIG. 49 (step S2501). If it is determined that the new song announcement flag is not set to “ON” (step S2501: NO), the process proceeds to the normal performance control process of step S2600.

  If the overall CPU 141 determines that the new song announcement flag is set to “ON” (step S2501: YES), the overall CPU 141 sets all flags related to the announcement announcement effect to “OFF” (step S2502). Here, all the flags relating to the announcement announcement effect are specifically the announcement announcement flag, the after-start flag, the development start flag, and the prohibition flag shown in FIG.

  Following the processing of step S2502, the overall CPU 141 identifies the current date based on the latest RTC information stored in the control RAM 145 (step S2504), and the current state is determined in the same manner as the processing of step S2107. It is determined whether or not all songs are released (step S2504).

  If the overall CPU 141 determines that all songs are not released (step S2504: NO), the general CPU 141 sets the public management table (see FIG. 40) stored in the control ROM 144 in the control RAM 145 (step S2505), and A new song corresponding to the date is selected (step S2506). For example, if the current date is July 9, 2012, this date is between July 7, 2012, the first announcement date of new song A, and July 14, 2012, the first announcement date of new song B Because of this date, the new song A is selected. For example, if the current date is July 14, 2012, this date is July 14, 2012, which is the initial announcement date of the new song B, so the new song B is selected.

  By the way, when the date on which the new song announcement effect is executed is a date other than the first announcement date, there is one kind of new song used for the new song announcement effect on that day. On the other hand, if the date on which the new song announcement effect is performed is the day corresponding to the first announcement date, the type of new song changes before and after the transition to the release permission state, so the new song used for the new song announcement effect on that day There are two types. For this reason, when the current date is the first announcement date, it is necessary to determine which of the two types of new songs is used.

  Therefore, after the process of step S2506, the overall CPU 141 determines whether or not it is the first announcement date based on whether or not the current date corresponds to one of the first announcement dates specified in the disclosure management table. Is determined (step S2507). If it is determined that the date is not the first announcement date (step S2507: NO), setting information for executing the new song announcement effect of the new song selected in step S2506 is set in the control RAM 145 (step S2508). When setting information related to the new song announcement effect is set in the control RAM 145 in this way, a display list for the main liquid crystal is created based on the setting information and set in the display list storage area 1491. As a result, the new song presentation effect selected in step S2506 is started.

  On the other hand, if the overall CPU 141 determines that it is the first announcement date (step S2507: YES), the overall CPU 141 determines whether or not the presentation permission flag stored in the control RAM 145 is set to “ON” (step S2507). ).

  As illustrated in FIG. 40, when the current date is, for example, July 14, 2012 corresponding to the first announcement date of the new song B and the announcement permission flag is set to “ON”, the first date of the new song B It is necessary to set the setting information for executing the new song announcement effect. On the other hand, when the current date is, for example, July 14, 2012 corresponding to the first announcement date of the new song B and the announcement permission flag is set to “OFF”, the new song B is not the new song B but 1 It is necessary to set setting information for executing the new song announcement effect of the previous new song A.

  Therefore, if the overall CPU 141 determines that the presentation permission flag is set to “ON” (step S2509: YES), the new song selected in the process of step S2506 is the same as the case where it is determined that it is not the first announcement date. Setting information for executing the new song announcement effect is set (step S2508). Conversely, when it is determined that the presentation permission flag is not set to “ON” (step S2509: NO), that is, when the presentation permission flag is set to “OFF”, 1 of the new song selected in the process of step S2506 is displayed. Setting information for executing the new song announcement effect of the previous new song is set in the control RAM 145 (step S2510).

  As described above, the overall CPU 141 determines that the initial presentation permission time specified in the public management table has passed, sets the presentation permission flag to “ON”, and then satisfies the time condition that the elapsed time reaches one hour. Is determined, the main liquid crystal display device 5 is caused to start the first new song announcement effect of the new song (new song B in the above example). On the other hand, if it is determined that the above time condition is satisfied without determining that the initial announcement permission time has passed, the first new song that has already been released is performed without performing the first new song announcement effect of the new song. Execute the new song announcement production.

  Subsequent to step S2508, the overall CPU 141 determines whether the presentation permission flag is set to “ON” (step S2511). If it is determined that the presentation permission flag is set to “ON” (step S2511: YES), the presentation permission flag is set to “OFF” (step S2512).

  On the other hand, if the overall CPU 141 determines that all songs are open (step S2504: YES), it sets the presentation order management table (see FIG. 43) in the control RAM 145 (step S2514). Based on the reset processing count P stored in the control RAM 145, the elapsed time since the power-on of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is specified (step S2515). Here, the reset processing count P is set to “0” when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered on, and is incremented by “1” every time the process of step S2108 (see FIG. 39) is performed. For this reason, the overall CPU 141 specifies the reset processing count P immediately after determining that the new song announcement flag is set to “ON” as the elapsed time. For example, when the number of reset processing is updated to “1”, it can be determined that 1 hour has passed at the update timing, and when updated to “3”, 3 hours have passed at the update timing. It can be judged.

  Subsequent to step S2515, the overall CPU 141 selects a new song corresponding to the current date specified in step S2503 and the elapsed time specified in step S2515 (step S2516). Specifically, the type of new song corresponding to the specified current date and the elapsed time since power-on is read from the presentation order management table. For example, if the current date is September 30 and three hours have passed since the power was turned on, the new song C is selected. For example, if the current date is October 4 and 10 hours have passed since the power was turned on, the new song B is selected.

  Then, following the processing of step S2516, the overall CPU 141 sets setting information for executing the new song announcement effect of the selected new song in the control RAM 145, similarly to the processing of step S2508 (step S2517). The processing of step S2514 to step S2517 is performed every time one hour elapses with reference to the time when the power is turned on in the state where all songs are released.

  In this way, the overall CPU 141 individually sets the execution timings of the new song announcement effects of the new songs A to L on the current date, and executes the new song announcement effects of each new song at the set execution timing.

  In addition, although this embodiment demonstrated the case where the execution timing of the new song announcement effect of each new song in the all-song open state was set using the presentation order management table illustrated in FIG. 43, as another embodiment, Such a configuration may be adopted. That is, in this embodiment, the case where the execution timing of all new songs is defined in the presentation order management table has been described. However, the execution date and the new song used for the new song announcement effect that is executed first on the execution date are described. The types may be associated with each other and stored in advance, and the new music may be regularly selected as, for example, new music D, new music E, and new music F.

  Moreover, the information which shows the new music (for example, new music F) used for the first new music announcement production of the previous day is held, and the next day (for example, new music G) is selected in order from the next music. May be.

  Also, instead of storing information specifying the execution timing such as the presentation order management table in advance, for example, a random selection using random numbers is performed in a state where all songs are released, and new songs to be used for new song announcement effects are randomly determined. You may do it. In this case, information indicating the type of the new song already used in the new song announcement effect is retained so that the new song announcement effect of the same song is not performed more than once a day, and the song is selected by the selection lottery. Then, a configuration of redoing the selection lottery may be added.

  As described above, the overall CPU 141 controls the start timing of the new song presentation effect and the type of the new song to be used based on the elapsed time measurement result, the RTC information, the disclosure management table, and the presentation order management table. That is, the main liquid crystal display device 5 is caused to execute a new song presentation effect regardless of whether the special symbols are variably displayed by the special symbol indicators 41 and 42 or not.

[Flow of production before and after the new song announcement]
Next, the flow of each effect before and after the new song announcement effect will be described with reference to FIGS.

  FIG. 50 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the flow of the production when the announcement notice production start time is reached in the customer waiting state. When a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses after the customer waiting command is transmitted from the game control board 100, the state shifts to the customer waiting state. In this customer waiting state, as illustrated in FIG. 50, a predetermined customer waiting effect image is displayed in the entire area (see FIG. 50A). If the announcement notice production start time is reached with such a customer waiting production, the normal production accompanying the game using the game ball is not performed, so even if the announcement announcement production is started immediately There is no risk of losing the interest of normal production. For this reason, when the start time of the announcement notice effect is reached while the customer waiting effect is being performed, the announcement notice effect using the upper region is immediately started (see FIG. 50B). In this case, since the start time of the announcement notice effect is the same as the actual start time, the countdown display is started from 60 seconds. In addition, since it was a customer waiting state at the time of the start of announcement announcement effect, the area | region for displaying the image which concerns on a normal effect is ensured by displaying the decorative symbol of a stop display state in the lower area.

  Thereafter, when the start time of the new song announcement effect is reached, the new song announcement effect is started using the upper area used for the announcement notice effect until then (see FIG. 50C). If the right to determine the special symbol is not generated even after the new song announcement effect is finished, the display of the customer waiting effect image using the entire area is resumed (see FIG. 50D). On the other hand, when a game ball wins the first starting port 11 during the announcement announcement effect or the new song announcement effect, the normal effect accompanying the change display of the special symbol is started in the dot display using the lower area. .

  FIG. 51 is an explanatory diagram for describing the flow of effects when the start time of the announcement notice effect is reached with the first special symbol determination right held. As exemplified in FIG. 51 (A), when the start time of the announcement notice effect is reached during execution of the normal effect accompanying the change display of the special symbol, the normal effect is displayed at this timing in order to start the announcement notice effect. If the screen configuration is changed, the interest of normal production will be lost. For this reason, if the special symbol variation display ends with the right to determine the first special symbol pending before the new song announcement effect is started, the normal performance associated with the next special symbol variation display starts. At this time, the area for displaying the normal effect image is changed from the entire area to the lower area (see FIG. 51B). Along with this, the announcement notice effect is started using the upper region. Since the announcement notice effect is started after the normal effect that was being executed at the start time of the announcement notice effect is ended, the countdown display is started from a time shorter than 60 seconds.

  Thereafter, when the start time of the new song announcement effect is reached, the new song announcement effect is started using the upper area that has been used for the announcement notice effect until then (see FIG. 51C). Since the game has continued before the start time of the announcement announcement effect here, a special pattern is used using the lower area between the start of the announcement announcement effect and the end of the new song announcement effect. A normal production is performed with the fluctuation display. In addition to the decorative symbols displayed in dots, a hold display image indicating that the first special symbol determination is put on hold is also displayed in the lower area. If the right to determine the first special symbol is reserved when the new song announcement effect ends, the area for displaying the image of the normal effect is displayed at the bottom as the first special symbol determination is digested. The area is returned to the entire area (see FIG. 51D).

  FIG. 52 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the flow of effects when the announcement notice effect start time is reached in a state where the right to determine the first special symbol is not reserved. If it is the start time of the announcement notice effect during the execution of the normal effect accompanying the change display of the special symbol, if you change the screen structure of the normal effect at this time to start the announcement notice effect, the interest of the normal effect will be It will be damaged. For this reason, if the change display of the special symbol is terminated in a state where the right of the first special symbol determination is not held before the new song announcement effect is started, the normal effect accompanying the change display of the special symbol is ended. At this time, the area for displaying the normal effect image is changed from the entire area to the lower area (see FIGS. 52A and 52B). Along with this, the announcement notice effect is started using the upper region. Since the announcement notice effect is started after the normal effect that was being executed at the start time of the announcement notice effect is ended, the countdown display is started from a time shorter than 60 seconds.

  Thereafter, when the start time of the new song announcement effect is reached, the new song announcement effect is started using the upper area that has been used for the announcement notice effect until then (see FIG. 52C). If the right to determine the first special symbol is reserved when the new song announcement effect ends, the area for displaying the image of the normal effect is displayed at the bottom as the first special symbol determination is digested. The area is returned to the entire area (see FIG. 52D).

  FIG. 53 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the flow of effects when the start time of the announcement notice effect is reached during the long open round game. As illustrated in FIG. 53 (A), during a long open round game in a long hit game, as a normal effect, an in-round effect image including a current round number, a total number of winning balls, a message for prompting a right strike, and the like. Displayed in the whole area. If the start time of the announcement notice effect is reached during the execution of the normal effect (here the effect during the round) associated with the long open round game, the screen configuration of the effect during the round is changed at this timing to start the announcement notice effect. And the interest of the production during the round is spoiled. For this reason, at the start of the in-round effect relating to the next long open round game, the area in which the in-round effect image is displayed is changed from the entire area to the lower area (see FIGS. 53A and 53B). Along with this, the announcement notice effect is started using the upper region.

  Thereafter, when the start time of the new song announcement effect is reached, the new song announcement effect is started using the upper area used for the announcement notice effect until then (see FIG. 53C). In addition, when the long hit game ends and the special symbol change display is started during the announcement announcement effect or the new song announcement effect, the special symbol change is displayed in the same lower area used for the effect during the round. A normal effect image accompanying the display is displayed. If the right to determine the first special symbol is reserved when the new song announcement effect ends, the area for displaying the image of the normal effect is displayed at the bottom as the first special symbol determination is digested. The area is returned to the entire area (see FIG. 53D).

  FIG. 54 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the flow of effects when the start time of the announcement notice effect is reached after the start of the final round during the long hit game or during the short hit game. When the long open round game of the final round is completed, an image of the ending effect is displayed in the entire area as illustrated in FIG. 54A as the image of the normal effect. On the other hand, although not shown in the figure, during the short hit game, a short hit effect image is displayed in the upper area. When the start time of the announcement notice effect is reached when these images are displayed during the ending of the special game, the screen structure of the normal effect related to the ending is changed at this timing in order to start the announcement notice effect. Ordinary production will be lost. For this reason, at the timing when the ending ends, the area where the normal effect image is displayed is changed from the entire area to the lower area (see FIGS. 54A and 54B). Along with this, the announcement notice effect is started using the upper region. FIG. 54 (B) shows an example in which the ending ends in a state where the right to determine the first special symbol is not reserved.

  Thereafter, when the start time of the new song announcement effect is reached, the new song announcement effect is started using the upper area that has been used for the announcement notice effect until then (see FIG. 54C). If the right to determine the first special symbol is reserved when the new song announcement effect ends, the area for displaying the image of the normal effect is displayed at the bottom as the first special symbol determination is digested. The area is returned to the entire area (see FIG. 54D).

  FIG. 55 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the flow of effects in the case where the normal effect accompanying the change display of the special symbol does not end even when the start time of the new song announcement effect is reached. If the start time of the announcement announcement effect is reached during the execution of the normal production accompanying the long fluctuation such that the variation time of the special symbol exceeds 1 minute, the normal production may not end even when the start time of the new song announcement effect is reached. In such a case, when the normal production develops before the start time of the new song announcement production, the announcement notice production is started at the development timing (see FIGS. 55A and 55B). Along with this, an image for a normal effect is displayed in the lower area, but if the so-called hot normal effect display area that develops into super reach, for example, is changed to the lower area, the image of the normal effect becomes smaller. There is a possibility that the interest of normal production will be lost. Therefore, in the present embodiment, at the development timing described above, while starting the dot display of the normal effect image in the lower area, the normal effect image displayed in the entire area is reduced to reduce the announcement notice effect or new song announcement in the upper area. It is supposed to be superimposed on the effect image (see FIGS. 55B and 55C). Then, the normal effect using only the lower region is started at the timing when the normal effect that has been displayed in a reduced size ends and the normal effect that accompanies the next variable symbol display is started (see FIG. 55D). ).

  FIG. 56 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the flow of the effect when the normal effect accompanying the change display of the special symbol does not end even when the new song announcement effect starts. Unlike the example described with reference to FIG. 55, if the normal effect accompanying the change display of the special symbol does not develop before the new song announcement effect is started, the changeover timing of the effect is changed during the time of the announcement notice effect. not exist. Therefore, in such a case, in this embodiment, the announcement effect is not performed, and the normal effect is switched to the reduced display at the timing when the new song announcement effect is started (FIGS. 56A and 56B). )reference). The reason why the image of the normal effect is not reduced and displayed until the start of the new song announcement effect is to display the image of the normal effect on the full screen for as long as possible. Incidentally, when the normal effect image is displayed in a reduced size in the upper area, as in the example of FIG. 55, the decorative pattern displayed in dots in the lower area so as to be linked to the decorative pattern included in the normal effect image. Are displayed in a variable manner (see FIGS. 55B and 55C and FIGS. 56B and 56C).

  After that, when the image of the normal effect including the decorative design indicating that the result of the special symbol determination is lost is displayed, the image of the normal effect superimposed on the image of the new song announcement effect is deleted. For example, At the timing when the normal effect accompanying the change display of the special symbol is started, the normal effect using only the lower region is started (see FIGS. 56C and 56D).

[Normal production control processing by image sound control board 140]
57 to 60 are detailed flowcharts of the normal performance control process in step S2600 of FIG. In this normal effect control process, setting information related to the normal effect is set in the control RAM 145. The display of the main liquid crystal display device 5 is controlled based on the display list for the main liquid crystal created based on the setting information, thereby realizing a normal effect.

  Subsequent to the new song announcement effect start process in step S2500, the overall CPU 141 determines whether or not a command from the effect control board 130 has been received as shown in FIG. 57 (step S2601). If it is determined that a command has not been received (step S2601: NO), the process proceeds to the new song presentation effect end process in step S2700.

  When determining that the command from the effect control board 130 has been received (step S2601: YES), the overall CPU 141 determines whether the command is a customer waiting effect start command (step S2602). If it is determined that the command is a customer waiting effect start command (step S2602: YES), setting information for starting display of the predetermined customer waiting effect image is set in the control RAM 145 (step S2603). However, if the announcement announcement effect or the new song announcement effect is executed at the timing when the image sound control board 140 receives the customer waiting effect start command, the general CPU 141 changes to the customer waiting effect after the new song announcement effect ends. Set the setting information.

  In the present embodiment, the case where a predetermined customer waiting effect is executed has been described. However, as with the opening effect and the ending effect of the long hit game, each time the first new song announcement effect of a new song is performed, The video used may be changed as appropriate based on the latest song, or the latest song may be output from the speaker 24 during the customer waiting effect. Thereby, before the player starts the game, it is possible to grasp to which new song a new song has been announced or to predict a new song to be released next.

  If the overall CPU 141 executes the process of step S2603 or determines that the command from the effect control board 130 is not a customer command (step S2602: NO), the command from the effect control board 130 is a hold display command. It is determined whether or not (step S2605).

  The normal effect in the present embodiment is performed using the entire area when the announcement announcement effect or the new song announcement effect is not performed, and is performed using the lower region when these effects are performed. Therefore, the hold display image indicating that the first special symbol determination is put on hold is displayed in the entire area when these effects are not performed (see, for example, FIG. 51A), and these effects are performed. When displayed, it is displayed in the lower area (see, for example, FIGS. 51B and 51C). Further, since the special symbol determination is not performed during the special game, the hold display image is not displayed during the special game (see, for example, FIGS. 53A and 53B). In order to realize such display control of the hold display image, the overall CPU 141 executes the following processing.

  That is, if the overall CPU 141 determines that the command from the effect control board 130 is a hold display command (step S2605: YES), for example, based on the processing status of the VDP 142, determines whether or not the announcement announcement effect is being performed. (Step S2606). If it is determined that the announcement announcement effect is not being executed (step 2606: NO), it is determined whether or not the new song announcement effect is being executed (step S2607). If it is determined that the new song presentation effect is not being executed (step S2607: NO), setting information for additionally displaying the hold display image in the entire area is set in the control RAM 145 (step S2608).

  If the overall CPU 141 determines that the announcement announcement effect is being executed (step S2606: YES) or if it is determined that the new song announcement effect is being executed (step S2607: YES), for example, from the effect control board 130 Based on the reception status of the command related to the special game, the elapsed time since the command was received, etc., it is determined whether or not the special game is being played (step S2609).

  When determining that the special game is not being played (step S2609: NO), the overall CPU 141 sets setting information for additionally displaying the hold display image in the lower area in the control RAM 145 (step S2610).

  The overall CPU 141 executes the process of step S2608, executes the process of step S2610, determines that the command from the effect control board 130 is not a hold display command (step S2605: NO), or during special game (Step S2609: YES), it is determined whether or not the command from the effect control board 130 is a change effect start command (step S2612).

  If the overall CPU 141 determines that the command from the effect control board 130 is a change effect start command (step S2612: YES), the overall CPU 141 determines whether or not the new song announcement effect has never been performed. (Step S2613). Specifically, based on whether or not the current date and time indicated by the RTC information is the date and time before the first announcement date and the first announcement time of the new song A defined in the disclosure management table (see FIG. 40). It is determined whether or not it is in an unpublished state.

  If the overall CPU 141 determines that it is in an unpublished state (step S2613: YES), it sets a default table in the control RAM 145 as a display list creation table (step S2614).

  On the other hand, if the overall CPU 141 determines that it is not in an unpublished state (step S2613: NO), it determines whether or not an announcement announcement effect is being executed (step S2615), similarly to the process of step S2606. If it is determined that the announcement announcement effect is not being executed (step S2615: NO), it is determined whether or not the new song announcement effect is being executed (step S2616), as in the process of step S2607.

  If the overall CPU 141 determines that the announcement announcement effect is being executed (step S2615: YES) or if it is determined that the new song announcement effect is being executed (step S2616: YES), a dot is displayed as the display list creation table. An effect table is set in the control RAM 145 (step S2617).

  When determining that the new song announcement effect is not being executed (step S2616: NO), the overall CPU 141 identifies a new song used for the previous new song announcement effect (step S2618). For example, if the new song information indicating the new song used for the new song announcement effect is held in the control RAM 145 and the new song information is updated every time the new song announcement effect is performed, it is used for the previous new song announcement effect. Can be identified.

  Subsequent to the processing in step S2618, the overall CPU 141 sets a main table corresponding to the specified new song in the control RAM 145 (step S2619). Specifically, as illustrated in FIG. 37, in the present embodiment, twelve main tables of the new song A main table to the new song L main table are stored in the control ROM 144, so these twelve main tables are stored. The main table of the new song identified by the processing in step S2618 is selected and set in the control RAM 145.

  The overall CPU 141 acquires a random number for selection when the process of step S2617 is executed, when the process of step S2614 is executed, or when the process of step S2619 is executed (step S2620). Specifically, the image acoustic control board 140 performs a random number update process for updating the selection random number or the like at a predetermined cycle shorter than the interrupt process, and the overall CPU 141 performs effect control on the selection random number. The value at the time of receiving the change effect start command from the board 130 is acquired.

  Then, the overall CPU 141 determines the display content in the normal effect based on the acquired selection random number and the set display list creation table (step S2621). In the display list creation table, a special symbol variation pattern and a plurality of effect patterns of normal effects are associated with each other. Then, for each of the plurality of effect patterns of the normal effect, the type of image data used as a material when generating images of each effect (decorative symbol effect, background image effect, character effect, etc.) constituting the normal effect, A random number for selection is associated. The general CPU 141 first analyzes the change effect start command and specifies the effect pattern of the current normal effect. Then, the type of image data used for the normal effect is determined by specifying the type of image data corresponding to the random number for selection acquired in step S2620 for the specified effect pattern. The types of image data include default, new song A, new song B, new song C, new song D, new song E, new song F, new song G, new song H, new song I, new song J, new song K, and new song L. For example, when default is selected as the type of image data for the background image effect, a default background image generated using the default image data is displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 5 and a new song A is selected. The new song A background image generated using the image data of the new song A is displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 5.

  The overall CPU 141 sets setting information for starting display of the normal effect image having the display content determined in the process of step S2621 in the control RAM 145 (step S2622). The display list generated based on the setting information is set in the display list storage area 1491, so that a normal effect using the main liquid crystal display device 5 is started.

  In this way, the overall CPU 141 causes the main liquid crystal display device 5 to perform a normal effect when the special symbols are variably displayed on the first special symbol display 41 or the second special symbol display 42. At that time, it is determined which new song announcement effect has been executed by the main liquid crystal display device 5, and a display list creation table is selected based on the determination result.

  Here, a change in the background image during the normal production triggered by each display list creation table and the new song announcement production will be described. Here, the change in the normal effect will be described by taking an example of the change in the background image triggered by the new song announcement effect. However, the character displayed on the display screen of the main liquid crystal display device 5, the BGM output from the speaker 24, etc. It will change with the new song announcement production.

  FIG. 61 is a schematic diagram of a default table. As illustrated in FIG. 61, the default table defines two types of image data for generating a background image: a first default background and a second default background. For example, when the selection random number is 100, in the default table, 50 different selection random numbers are assigned to these two types of backgrounds. For this reason, in the said step S2621, it selects in the ratio of 50%, respectively. This default table is used from the time when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is introduced into the pachinko hall until the first new song announcement effect of the new song A is performed, and thereafter, it is not used even in the state where all songs are released.

  FIG. 62 is a schematic diagram of the new song A main table. As illustrated in FIG. 62, the new song A main table defines three types of image data for generating a background image: a first default background, a second default background, and a new song A background. . For example, if the selection random number is 100, in the new song A main table, 25 selection random numbers are assigned to the first default background, and 25 similarly to the second default background. Random numbers for selection are assigned, and 50 random numbers for selection are assigned to the background of the new song A. Therefore, in step S2621, the new song A background is selected at a rate of 50%, the second default background is selected at a rate of 25%, and the first default background is selected at the rate of 25%.

  The new song A main table is used for one week from when the first new song announcement effect of the new song A is started until the first new song announcement effect of the new song B is started before the transition to the all songs open state. When the first new song announcement effect of the new song A is performed, the background image of the new song A is most likely to appear at 50% for one week, so the player can produce the new song A after the new song announcement effect of the new song A is performed. Can also enjoy the new song announcement production after the first time of the new song A.

  The new song A main table is different from the default table in that the new song A background can be newly selected. Here, for example, if the selection ratios of the first default background, the second default background, and the new song A background are set to be the same, the appearance rate of the normal effect based on the new song A is lowered. As a result, the opportunity for the player to enjoy the normal production based on the new song A is reduced, and the normal production is switched by the first new song announcement production of the new song A (the production related to the new song A is newly added). There is a possibility of disappearing. Thus, in the present embodiment, the selection rate of the new song A background is increased by lowering the selection rates of the first default background and the second default background compared to the default table.

  As is clear from the above description, the general CPU 141 selects the default table until the first new song announcement effect for the new song A is performed, and the effect using the normal effect data stored in the CGROM 148 is set as the normal effect. The main liquid crystal display device 5 is caused to execute. On the other hand, after the first new song announcement effect of the new song A is performed, the selection rates of the first default background and the second default background are set lower than the default table, and instead, the selection rate of the new song A background. The new song A main table set with the highest is selected. Thereby, the main liquid crystal display device 5 is caused to execute the effect using the specific effect data (here, the image data of the new song A) stored in the CGROM 148 as the normal effect.

  FIG. 63 is a schematic diagram of the new song B main table. As illustrated in FIG. 63, the new song B main table defines three types of image data for generating a background image: a second default background, a new song A background, and a new song B background. For example, if the selection random number is 100, in the new song B main table, 15 selection random numbers are assigned to the second default background, and 35 selections are made for the new song A background. A random number for use is assigned, and 50 selection random numbers are assigned to the background of the new song B. Therefore, in step S2621, the new song B background is selected at a rate of 50%, the new song A background is selected at a rate of 35%, and the second default background is selected at a rate of 15%.

  The new song B main table is used for one week from when the first new song announcement effect of the new song B is started until the first new song announcement effect of the new song C is started before shifting to the open state of all songs. When the first new song announcement effect of the new song B is performed, the background image of the new song B is most likely to appear at 50%, so that the player can enjoy the production of the new song B even after the new song B announcement effect is performed. In addition, before the transition to the all-track open state, it is possible to enjoy the new song announcement effect after the first time of the new song B.

  The new song B main table is different from the new song A main table in that the new song B can be newly selected and the first default background is excluded. Here, if the first default background is not excluded, the selectable backgrounds are the first default background, the second default background, the new song A background, and the new song B background. The problem arises that the background selection rate cannot be set too high. Further, when trying to further increase the selection rate of the new song B background, there arises a problem that not only the default background but also the selection rate of the new song A background must be lowered. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the new song B is excluded by excluding the first default background included in the new song A main table (the selection rate is “0”) and lowering the selection rate of the second default background. While the background selection rate is increased, the selection rate of the new song A background is suppressed from being unnecessarily low.

  FIG. 64 is a schematic diagram of the new song C main table. As illustrated in FIG. 64, in the new song C main table, three types of new song A background, new song B background, and new song C background are defined as types of image data for generating a background image. For example, if the selection random number is 100, in the new song C main table, 20 selection random numbers are assigned to the new song A background, and 30 selection random numbers are used for the new song B background. A random number is assigned, and 50 selection random numbers are assigned to the new song C background. Therefore, in step S2621, the new song C background is selected at a rate of 50%, the new song B background is selected at a rate of 30%, and the new song A background is selected at a rate of 20%.

  This new song C main table is used for one week from when the first new song announcement effect of the new song C is started until the first new song announcement effect of the new song D is started before the transition to the all songs open state. When the first new song announcement effect of the new song C is performed, the background image of the new song C is most likely to appear at 50%. Therefore, the player can enjoy the new song C after the new song announcement effect of the new song C is performed. In addition, before the transition to the all-track open state, it is possible to enjoy the new song announcement effect after the first time of the new song C.

  The new song C main table is different from the new song B main table in that the new song C is newly selectable and the second default background is excluded. That is, the second default background is excluded in order to set the appearance rate of the new song C background image to the highest and set the appearance rate of the new song A and the new song B as high as possible. That is, when the new song C main table is used, the normal effect data stored in the CGROM 148 is not used, and only the specific effect data is used.

  FIG. 65 is a schematic diagram of the new song D main table. As illustrated in FIG. 65, in the new song D main table, four types of new song A background, new song B background, new song C background, and new song D background are defined as types of image data for generating a background image. ing. For example, if the selection random number is 100, in the new song D main table, 10 selection random numbers are assigned to the new song A background, and 20 selections are used for the new song B background. Random numbers are assigned, 30 selection random numbers are assigned to the new song C background, and 40 selection random numbers are assigned to the new song D background. Therefore, in step S2621, the new song D background is selected at a rate of 40%, the new song C background is selected at a rate of 30%, the new song B background is selected at a rate of 20%, and the remaining 10% rate. The new song A background is selected.

  The new song D main table is used for one week from when the first new song announcement effect of the new song D is started until the first new song announcement effect of the new song E is started before the transition to the all songs open state. When the first new song announcement effect of the new song D is performed, the background image of the new song C is most likely to appear at 40%, so that the player can enjoy the new song D after the new song D announcement effect is performed. In addition, before the transition to the state in which all songs are released, it is possible to enjoy the new song announcement effect after the first time of the new song D.

  The new song D main table is different from the new song C main table in that the new song D can be newly selected. In addition, when comparing by the selection rate, the selection rate of the first default background and the second default background is set to 0% in both main tables, so that the appearance rate of the default background is lowered in the new song D main table. Instead of the method, the selectivity of the new song D is set to the highest value by lowering the selectivity of the previously released new song (here, new songs A to C). The same applies to the tables after the new song E main table.

  FIG. 66 is a schematic diagram of the new song E main table. As illustrated in FIG. 66, in the new song E main table, 5 types of new song A background, new song B background, new song C background, new song D background, and new song E background are used as the types of image data for generating the background image. The type is specified. For example, if the selection random number is 100, in the new song E main table, five selection random numbers are assigned to the new song A background, and ten selection random numbers are used for the new song B background. Random numbers are assigned, 20 selection random numbers are assigned to the new song C background, 25 selection random numbers are assigned to the new song D background, and 40 selections are assigned to the new song E background. Random numbers are assigned. Therefore, in step S2621, the new song E background is selected at a rate of 40%, the new song D background is selected at a rate of 25%, the new song C background is selected at a rate of 20%, and the rate of 10%. The new song B background is selected and the remaining 5% of the new song A background is selected.

  FIG. 67 is a schematic diagram of the new song L main table. As illustrated in FIG. 67, in the new song L main table, twelve types of new song A background to new song L background are defined, and as with the other main tables, the selection rate of the latest song is the highest. A random number for selection is assigned (20% in the example shown in FIG. 67). In this new song L main table, the background images of all new songs used for the new song announcement effect are defined, so until one week has passed since the first new song announcement effect of the new song L was performed, the player Can enjoy the normal effects of all new songs, centering on the normal effects using the new song L.

  FIG. 68 is an explanatory diagram for describing a change in image data used for drawing a background image. FIG. 69 is an explanatory diagram for describing changes in the appearance rate of various background images. In FIG. 68 and FIG. 69, “◎” indicates the background that is most likely to appear, “◯” indicates the background that may not appear to have the highest appearance rate, and “×” indicates the possibility that it may appear. There is no background.

  From the time when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is introduced to the pachinko hall until one week elapses, a display list is created using the default table (see FIG. 61) described above for the normal performance. For this reason, the background image that appears in the normal performance until one week has passed since the introduction is the first default background or the second default background. In the second week of introduction, a display list is created using the above-described new song A main table (see FIG. 62). For this reason, in the normal production in the second week of introduction, the new song A background is most likely to appear, the second default background is likely to appear next, and the first default background is least likely to appear.

  In the third week of introduction, a display list is created using the new song B main table (see FIG. 63). For this reason, in the normal performance in the third week of introduction, the new song B background appears newly at the highest appearance rate, and the first default background does not appear. In the fourth week after introduction, a display list is created using the new song C main table (see FIG. 64). For this reason, in the normal performance in the fourth week of introduction, the new song C background newly appears at the highest appearance rate, and the second default background also does not appear. Thereafter, every time one week elapses, a background image of a new new song is added and the number of types of background images finally becomes twelve. Therefore, variations of normal effects increase.

  Up to this point, the background image in the normal performance before the release of all songs has been explained. However, when the release of all songs, the new song announcement effect is a new song announcement effect that is performed every hour on the basis of power-on. It is changed every time it is performed (see FIG. 43). For this reason, the selection switching of the display list creation table was performed every week before the release of all songs, but the selection switching of the display list creation table is performed every hour when the release of all songs is performed. become.

  By the way, in the main table (for example, the new song L main table and the new song K main table) corresponding to the new song used for the final new song announcement effect before the entire song is released, the new song used for the initial new song announcement effect is used. The appearance rate of the background image of the initial new song is extremely low compared to the main table corresponding to (new song A main table and table on the new song B side) (see, for example, FIGS. 62 and 67). For this reason, for example, during the one week after the first new song announcement effect of the new song L is performed, the background images of the new song A and the new song B hardly appear and some players cannot see these background images. It is also possible.

  On the other hand, in the all-music release state, the selection switching of the display list creation table is performed every hour. For this reason, for example, the new song A main table and the new song B main table are used. As a result, it is possible to enjoy a background image that has been limited to only one hour of the day, but has been less visible.

  By the way, as described above, the time required for one normal production accompanying the change display of the special symbol is longer than the activation time of the announcement announcement production, and the normal production develops before the start time of the new song announcement production. In this case, the announcement notice effect is started at the development timing, and the normal effect is switched from the full screen display to the reduced display (see FIG. 55). Also, if the time required for one regular production accompanying the change display of the special symbol is longer than the activation time of the announcement announcement announcement, and the regular production does not develop before the start time of the new song announcement production, the announcement The notice effect is not performed, and the normal effect is switched to the reduced display at the timing when the new song announcement effect is started (see FIG. 56). In order to realize such control, the overall CPU 141 executes the following processing regarding the normal performance.

  That is, when the overall CPU 141 executes the process of step S2622 or determines that the variable effect start command has not been received (step S2612: NO), as shown in FIG. It is determined whether or not a development start flag indicating whether to start the announcement notice effect at the development timing is set to “ON” (step S2626). If it is determined that the development start flag is set to “ON” (step S2626: YES), it is determined whether or not it is the development timing, as in the process of step S2419 (see FIG. 45). (Step S2627).

  When determining that it is the development timing (step S2627: YES), the overall CPU 141 sets setting information for switching the full-screen display of the normal effect image to the reduced display in the control RAM 145 (step S2628). The display list generated based on the setting information set in step S2628 is set in the display list storage area 1491, whereby the drawing process as described above with reference to FIG. 15 is performed. Will be.

  The overall CPU 141 executes the process of step S2628, determines that the development start flag is not set to “ON” (step S2626: NO), or determines that it is not the development timing (step S2627). : NO), for example, based on whether or not the new song announcement flag is set to “ON”, it is determined whether or not it is the start timing of the new song announcement effect (step S2629).

  If the overall CPU 141 determines that it is the start timing of the new song announcement effect (step S2629: YES), it is determined whether or not a prohibition flag indicating whether or not to prohibit the announcement announcement effect is set to “ON”. Determination is made (step S2630). Here, if it is determined that the prohibition flag is set to “ON” (step S2630: YES), setting information for switching the full-screen display of the normal effect image to the reduced display, similarly to the process of step S2628. Is set in the control RAM 145 (step S2631). Thereby, as illustrated in FIG. 55, the normal effect image is switched to the reduced display simultaneously with the start of the new song presentation effect.

  The overall CPU 141 executes the process of step S2631, determines that it is not the start timing of the new song presentation effect (step S2629: NO), or determines that the prohibition flag is not set to “ON” (step) S2630: NO), it is determined whether or not the command from the effect control board 130 is a variation effect end command (step S2633). Here, if it is determined that the command is a variable effect end command (step S2633: YES), the normal effect executed by the main liquid crystal display device 5 and the speaker 24 is ended (step S2634).

  By the way, when the after-start flag indicating whether or not to start the announcement announcement effect after the variation effect accompanying the variation display of the special symbol is set to “ON”, the variation display of the special symbol this time It is necessary to start the announcement notice effect after the fluctuating effect accompanying the end. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when the first special symbol determination is not suspended, the variation of the special symbol next to the variation display of the special symbol of this time is not immediately started. At the timing when the display is completed, the announcement notice effect is started, and at the same time, the normal effect image including the decorative pattern in the stopped display state is displayed in dots in the lower area. In order to realize such control, the overall CPU 141 executes the following processing regarding the variation effect.

  That is, the overall CPU 141 determines whether or not the after-start flag is set to “ON” following the process of step S2634 (step S2635). Here, when it is determined that the start flag after the end is set to “ON” (step S2635: YES), the first special symbol determination is suspended as in the process of step S2422 (see FIG. 45). It is determined whether or not there is (step S2636). Here, when it is determined that the first special symbol determination is not suspended (step S2636: NO), setting information for dot-displaying the normal effect image including the stopped decorative symbol in the lower area is stored in the control RAM 145. It is set (step S2637).

  When the overall CPU 141 determines that the command from the effect control board 130 is not a variable effect end command when the process of step S2737 is executed (step S2633: NO), the after-start flag is set to “ON”. When it is determined that there is not (step S2635: NO), or when it is determined that the first special symbol determination is suspended (step S2636: YES), the following processing is executed regarding the winning effect relating to the long win game.

  That is, as illustrated in FIG. 59, the overall CPU 141 determines whether or not the command from the effect control board 130 is an opening effect start command related to a long hit game (step S2640). Here, if it is determined that the command is an opening effect start command (step S2640: YES), is the unreleased state in which a new song announcement effect has never been performed as in the process of step S2613 (see FIG. 57)? It is determined whether or not (step S2641). Here, when it is determined that the state has not been announced (step S2641: YES), a default opening effect image is selected (step S2642), and conversely, when it is determined that the state has not been unpublished (step S2641: NO). Then, an opening effect image based on the new song used for the final new song announcement effect is selected (step S2643).

  Next, when the overall CPU 141 executes the process of step S2642, or when the process of step S2643 is executed, whether or not the announcement notice effect is being executed, as in the process of step S2606 (see FIG. 57). Is determined (step S2644). If it is determined that the announcement announcement effect is not being executed (step S2644: NO), it is determined whether or not the new song announcement effect is being executed, similar to the process in step S2607 (see FIG. 57). (Step S2645).

  If the overall CPU 141 determines that the new song presentation effect is not being executed (step S2645: NO), setting information for starting full screen display of the opening effect image selected in step S2642 or step S2643 is displayed. The control RAM 145 is set (step S2646). On the other hand, when it is determined that the announcement announcement effect is being executed (step S2644: YES), or when it is determined that the new song announcement effect is being executed (step S2645: YES), it is selected in the process of step S2642 or step S2643. Setting information for starting the reduced display of the opening effect image is set in the control RAM 145 (step S2647).

  Subsequently, the overall CPU 141 determines that the command from the effect control board 130 is not an opening command (step S2640: NO), executes the process of step S2646, or executes the process of step S2647. It is determined whether or not the command from the control board 130 is an in-round production start command related to a long hit game (step S2649). If it is determined that the command is an in-round effect start command (step S2649: YES), setting information for displaying an in-round effect image corresponding to the number of rounds is set in the control RAM 145 (step S2650). In this way, the general CPU 141 switches the normal effect to be executed by the main liquid crystal display device 5 every time the long open round game is executed.

  When the overall CPU 141 determines that the command from the effect control board 130 is not the effect start command during the round (step S2649: NO), or when the process of step S2650 is executed, the command from the effect control board 130 selects the song. It is determined whether it is a screen display command (step S2651). If it is determined that the command is a music selection screen display command (step S2651: YES), the latest music is specified (step S2652). For example, if the new song information indicating the new song used for the new song announcement effect is held in the control RAM 145 and the new song information is updated every time the new song announcement effect is performed, it is used for the previous new song announcement effect. It is possible to specify a new song (latest song) that has been made.

  Subsequent to the process of step S2652, the overall CPU 141 displays setting information for displaying a music selection screen that allows selection of all new songs that have already been released including the latest song specified in the process of step S2652. (Step S2653).

  If the overall CPU 141 determines that the command from the effect control board 130 is not a music selection screen display command (step S2651: NO), or if the process of step S2653 is executed, the command music playback command from the effect control board 130 It is determined whether or not (step S2654). If it is determined that the command is a music playback command (step S2654: YES), setting information for starting the music of the selected new music is set in the control RAM 145 (step S2655). Note that which piece of music is selected may be specified based on an operation command that is set in the sub-RAM 133 in the process of step S12 (see FIG. 33) and transmitted from the effect control board 130 by the transmission process of step S13. Is possible.

  When the overall CPU 141 determines that the command from the effect control board 130 is not a music reproduction command (step S2654: NO), or when the process of step S2655 is executed, as shown in FIG. 60, the effect control board It is determined whether or not the command from 130 is an ending effect start command related to the long hit game (step S2658). If it is determined that the command is an ending effect start command (step S2658: YES), setting information for starting display of the ending effect image based on the same new song used for the opening effect is set in the control RAM 145. (Step S2659).

  If the overall CPU 141 determines that the command from the effect control board 130 is not an ending effect start command (step S2658: NO), or if the process of step S2659 is executed, the overall CPU 141 performs the following for the win effect related to the short win game. Execute the process.

  That is, the overall CPU 141 determines whether or not the command from the effect control board 130 is a short hit effect start command (step S2660). If it is determined that the command is a short hit effect start command (step S2660: YES), it is determined whether or not it is an unpublished state (step S2661) as in the process of step S2613. If it is determined that the state has not been announced (step S2661: YES), a default short win effect image is selected (step S2662). Conversely, if it is determined that the unreleased state has not been reached (step S2661: NO), a short hit effect image based on the new song used for the last new song announcement effect is selected (step S2663).

  When executing the process of step S2662, or when executing the process of step S2663, the overall CPU 141 determines whether or not the announcement announcement effect is being executed (step S2664), similarly to the process of step S2606. Here, if it is determined that the announcement announcement effect is not being executed (step S2664: NO), it is determined whether or not the new song announcement effect is being executed (step S2665), similarly to the process of step S2607.

  If the overall CPU 141 determines that the new song presentation effect is not being executed (step S2665: NO), setting information for starting full screen display of the short hit effect image selected in step S2662 or step S2663. Is set in the control RAM 145 (step S2666). On the other hand, when it is determined that the announcement announcement effect is being executed (step S2664: YES), or when it is determined that the new song announcement effect is being executed (step S2665: YES), the process of step S2662 or the process of step S2663 The setting information for starting the reduced display of the short hit effect image selected in (5) is set in the control RAM 145 (step S2667).

  Next, the overall CPU 141 determines that the command from the effect control board 130 is not a short hit effect start command (step S2660: NO), executes the process of step S2666, or executes the process of step S2667. In this case, it is determined whether or not the command from the effect control board 130 is a short hit effect end command (step S2668). Here, if it is determined that the command is a short hit effect end command (step S2668: YES), the short hit effect being executed is ended (step S2669). When the process of step S2669 is performed, or when it is determined that the command from the effect control board 130 is not the short hit effect end command (step S2668: NO), the new song announcement effect end process of step S2700 is processed. It is advanced.

[New song presentation effect end processing by image sound control board 140]
FIG. 70 is a detailed flowchart of the new song announcement effect end process in step S2700 of FIG. Following the normal performance control processing in step S2600, the overall CPU 141 determines whether or not the elapsed time since the start of the new song announcement effect has reached the time required for the new song announcement effect, for example, as illustrated in FIG. Based on, it is determined whether or not the new song announcement effect has ended (step S2701). If it is determined that the new song announcement effect has not ended (step S2701: NO), the process proceeds to the image output control process of step S2800.

  If the overall CPU 141 determines that the new song presentation effect has ended (step S2701: YES), whether or not the new song announcement effect end process for returning the normal effect image or the customer waiting effect image to the full screen display has been completed. Is determined (step S2702). Here, when it is determined that the end process has not been completed (step S2702: NO), for example, based on whether or not a variable effect start command is received after receiving a customer waiting effect start command from the effect control board 130, It is determined whether or not the customer is waiting (step S2703). If it is determined that the customer is waiting (step S2703: YES), setting information for returning to the normal screen mode is set in the control RAM 145 (step S2704).

  On the other hand, if the general CPU 141 determines that it is not in the customer waiting state (step S2703: NO), for example, based on the reception status of the command related to the special game from the effect control board 130, whether or not the long hit game is in progress Is determined (step S2705). If it is determined that the game is not long hit (step S2705: NO), it is determined whether or not a start command (for example, a variable effect start command) has been received (step S2706). If it is determined that the start command has not been received (step S2706: YES), the process proceeds to the image output control process in step S2800.

  When determining that the start command has been received (step S2706), the overall CPU 141 sets setting information for returning to the normal screen mode in the control RAM 145 (step S2707).

  That is, when the new song announcement effect is finished and the customer is in the waiting state, the process of step S2704 is performed and immediately returned to the normal screen mode, and when the new song announcement effect is finished, the customer is not in the waiting state and the special game. If not, for example, the normal screen mode is returned at the timing when the normal effect is started in response to the reception of the variable effect start command.

  Subsequent to the processing in step S2707, the overall CPU 141 determines whether or not the replay flag related to music reproduction is set to “ON” (step S2708). If it is determined that the replay flag is not set to “ON” (step S2708: NO), the process proceeds to the image output control process in step S2800.

  If the overall CPU 141 determines that the replay flag is set to “ON” (step S2708: YES), the overall CPU 141 controls setting information for starting playback of a new song indicated by the song information stored in the control RAM 145. The RAM 145 is set (step S2709). As a result, a new song that has not been played to the end due to the interruption of the announcement announcement effect or the new song announcement effect, despite being selected by the player during the long hit game, is played from the beginning. Then, following the processing of step S2709, the overall CPU 141 sets the replay flag to “OFF” (step S2710).

  On the other hand, if the overall CPU 141 determines that a long game is being played (step S2705: YES), based on whether or not an effect start command during the final round is received from the effect control board 130, the start of the last round It is determined whether or not (step S2711). If it is determined that it is before the start of the final round (step S2711: YES), the process proceeds to step S2706. In this case, the process proceeds to step S2707 at the timing when the in-round production start command is received as the start command.

  On the other hand, if the overall CPU 141 determines that it is not before the final round (step S2711: NO), for example, whether or not the ending effect has ended based on the elapsed time since the reception of the ending effect start command. Is determined (step S2712). If it is determined that the ending effect has not ended (step S2712: NO), the process proceeds to the image output control process in step S2800. Conversely, if it is determined that the ending effect has ended (step S2712: YES), the process proceeds to step S2707.

  By the way, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when the new song announcement effect ends, the main liquid crystal display device 5 notifies the user that a new song announcement effect using the next new song (unreleased song) will be performed. The next song will be announced. For example, when the new song announcement effect for the new song A is finished, the next song notice effect for the new song B, which is the next unreleased song, is performed. Perform a notice effect. In order to realize such a next tune announcement effect, when the end process of the new song announcement effect is completed, the following processing is performed.

  That is, if the overall CPU 141 determines that the new song announcement effect end process has been completed (step S2702: YES), it determines whether there is an unreleased song (step S2714). Specifically, with reference to the disclosure management table (see FIG. 40), it is determined whether or not there is a new song whose first announcement date is later than the new song used for the new song announcement effect performed this time.

  When determining that there is an unreleased song (step S2714: YES), the overall CPU 141 determines whether or not the next song notice effect has been completed (step S2715). If it is determined that the next song notice effect has not been completed (step S2715: NO), setting information for executing the next song notice effect is set in the control RAM 145 (step S2716). Specifically, the first announcement date of each unreleased song is compared, and the new song with the earliest announcement date is identified as the new song to be released next. For example, the title of the identified new song, the first new song of the new song, etc. Setting information for displaying the effect image including the remaining days until the presentation effect is performed on the main liquid crystal display device 5 is set in the control RAM 145. Note that the title of the new song and the remaining days can be determined based on the information stored in the disclosure management table and the RTC information.

[Image Output Control Processing by Image Acoustic Control Board 140]
FIG. 71 is a detailed flowchart of the image output control process in step S2800 of FIG. Subsequent to the new song announcement effect end process in step S2700, the overall CPU 141 determines whether or not setting information related to the main liquid crystal is stored in the control RAM 145 (step S2801). In the present embodiment, the normal effect (variation effect or winning effect), the announcement notice effect, the new song announcement effect, and the music reproduction effect are performed using the main liquid crystal display device 5, so that the normal effect is executed in step S2801. Whether or not at least one of setting information for executing the announcement announcement effect, setting information for executing the new song announcement effect, and setting information for starting the music reproduction is stored. To do.

  When determining that the setting information regarding the main liquid crystal is stored (step S2801: YES), the overall CPU 141 determines what screen configuration should be constructed based on the stored setting information, and the determination Based on the result, a display list for the main liquid crystal is created (step S2802). The created display list is set in the display list storage area 1491 (step S2803).

  When the overall CPU 141 executes the process of step S2803 or determines that the setting information regarding the main liquid crystal is not stored (step S2801: NO), whether the setting information regarding the sub liquid crystal is stored in the control RAM 145 or not. Is determined (step S2804). In the present embodiment, since the notification effect related to the new song announcement effect is performed using the sub liquid crystal display device 6, it is determined in this step S2804 whether or not setting information for executing the notification effect is stored.

  If it is determined that the setting information related to the sub liquid crystal is stored (step S2804: YES), the overall CPU 141 creates a display list for the sub liquid crystal (step S2805), and the created display list is stored in the display list storage area 1491. It is set (step S2806). When the process of step S2806 is executed, or when it is determined that the setting information regarding the sub liquid crystal is not stored (step S2804: NO), the process proceeds to the audio output control process of step S2900.

[Audio output control processing by the image acoustic control board 140]
FIG. 72 is a detailed flowchart of the audio output control process in step S2900 of FIG. Subsequent to the image output control process in step S2800, the overall CPU 141 performs the following process in order to synchronize the sound output from the speaker 24 with the effect executed by the main liquid crystal display device 5 according to the image output control process. Run.

  That is, the general CPU 141, for example, based on whether or not the display list for the main liquid crystal including the start instruction of the normal effect is set in the display list storage area 1491 in the process of step S2803, the normal effect image related to the normal effect is displayed. It is determined whether display has been started (step S2901).

  When determining that the display of the normal effect image is started (step S2901: YES), the overall CPU 141 determines whether or not the normal effect image is displayed in dots in the lower area (step S2902). Here, when it is determined that dots are not displayed (step S2902: NO), that is, when full-screen display of the normal effect image is started, audio output related to the normal effect image is output in synchronization with the normal effect image display. The sound DSP 143 is started (step S2903). On the other hand, when it is determined that the display is a dot display (step S2902: YES), the process of step S2903 is not performed in order to prioritize the audio output related to the announcement announcement effect or the new song announcement effect performed using the upper area. Then, the process proceeds to step S2904 described later.

  The overall CPU 141 executes the process of step S2903, determines that the display of the normal effect image is not started (step S2901: NO), or determines that the normal effect image is displayed in dots. (Step S2902: YES), it is determined whether or not to start the reduced display of the normal effect image (Step S2904). For example, when the display list for the main liquid crystal is created based on the setting information set in the control RAM 145 by the process of step S2628 (see FIG. 58), it is determined that the reduced display is started. .

  If the overall CPU 141 determines that the reduced display of the normal effect image is to be started (step S2904: YES), for example, based on the setting information related to the normal effect set in the control RAM 145, the normal effect is an effect of reach or higher. It is determined whether or not (step S2905). And when it determines with it being reach or more (step S2905: YES), ie, when the expectation degree which becomes a big hit is relatively high, the process which lowers | hangs the sound regarding a normal effect image and continues the audio | voice output of a normal effect is sound DSP143. (Step S2906). On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not reach or more (step S2905: NO), that is, when the expectation level that is a big hit is relatively low, or when the necessity for audio output is low, audio output related to the normal effect image is output to the acoustic DSP 143. Is stopped (step S2907).

  When determining that the reduced display of the normal effect is not started (step S2904: NO), the general CPU 141 executes the process of step S2906, or executes the process of step S2907, for example, in the process of step S2803. Based on whether or not the display list for main liquid crystal including the instruction to start the notice effect is set in the display list storage area 1491, it is determined whether or not the display of the announcement notice effect image related to the announcement notice effect is started ( Step S2908). If it is determined that display of the announcement announcement effect image has been started (step S2908: YES), the audio DSP 143 starts audio output related to the announcement announcement effect image in synchronization with the announcement announcement effect image display (step S2909).

  If the overall CPU 141 determines not to start displaying the announcement announcement effect image (step S2908: NO), or if the process of step S2909 is executed, the main CPU 141 includes, for example, the start instruction of the new song announcement effect in the process of step S2803. Based on whether or not the display list for liquid crystal is set in the display list storage area 1491, it is determined whether or not display of the new song announcement effect image related to the new song announcement effect is started (step S2910). If it is determined that the display of the new song announcement effect image is started (step S2910: YES), the sound DSP 143 is started to output the sound related to the new song announcement effect image in synchronization with the new song announcement effect image display (step S2911).

  On the other hand, when it is determined not to start displaying the new song announcement effect image (step S2910: NO), or when the process of step S2911 is executed, the process proceeds to the data transmission control process (see FIG. 38) of step S3000. It is done.

  In other embodiments, the following configuration may be employed. That is, in a situation where the variation effect and the new song announcement effect are performed simultaneously, it is preferable not to output the variation effect sound of the variation effect by the processing in step S2907, but immediately after the variation effect ends, When the symbol is stopped and displayed, it is preferable to output the symbol confirmation sound together with the effect sound of the new song announcement effect when the symbol control command is received by the effect control board 130. In this case, it is preferable to output the symbol definite sound at a volume larger than the production sound of the new song announcement effect. In addition, when the production sound of the new song announcement effect is output in the situation where the production without reach is being performed, the variation production sound is not output while the variation production sound is being output (while the design is changing). You may make it output with a louder volume than the production sound of production. In this case, when the reach effect is performed, for example, the reach effect indicating that the reliability for the jackpot is relatively low, such as the normal reach effect, the fluctuating effect sound is not output and the jackpot for the super reach effect (SP reach effect) or the like is not output. When the reach effect indicating that the reliability is relatively high is performed, the variation effect sound may be output at a volume larger than the effect sound of the new song announcement effect.

  Moreover, although 1st Embodiment demonstrated the case where a new song presentation effect (an example of a specific effect) was performed using several production | presentation means, such as the liquid crystal display device 5 and the speaker 24, using only one production | presentation means. A specific performance may be performed. As this one production | presentation means, the speaker 24 is mentioned, for example. As described above, when a specific effect is performed simultaneously with a game effect (such as a fluctuating effect or an effect during a round) using only the speaker 24, the sound control for outputting the effect sound of the specific effect with a greater effect sound than the effect sound of the game effect. In addition, when outputting the effect sound of the specific effect, it is conceivable to perform voice control so as not to output the effect sound of the game effect. However, when the latter voice control is employed, in a situation where a reach effect is performed as a game effect, it is preferable that the effect sound (fluctuating sound) related to the reach effect is output together with the effect sound of the specific effect. In addition, when the effect sound of the specific effect is output as the game effect in a situation where the variation effect related to the jackpot is being performed, the effect sound of the specific effect output from the speaker 24 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is adjacent. You may make it differ from the production sound of the specific production output from the speaker 24 of the other pachinko gaming machine 1.

[Operational effects of this embodiment]
As described above, according to the present embodiment, the main liquid crystal display device 5 and the speaker 24 that cannot be used for other effects because they are normally used for normal effects are used from the game control board 100. A new song presentation effect is executed that is irrelevant to the timing at which the effect control board 130 receives various commands (game information) and the information indicated by these commands. Therefore, an effect with a high degree of freedom can be executed without being greatly restricted by the game control board 100 that controls the game.

  In addition, when a new song announcement effect is performed, it is possible to execute a normal effect using specific effect data that was not used before the new song announcement effect was performed, so the new song announcement effect will appear in the normal effect so far The function of notifying the change of the effect state of the normal effect that the effect that was not performed will appear will be achieved. For this reason, not only is the degree of freedom high, but an effective performance can be executed.

  Further, in the present embodiment, even if the main liquid crystal display device 5 is used for the normal presentation accompanying the variation display of the special symbol, the new song is announced using the main liquid crystal display device 5 without being affected by the variation display of the special symbol. Since the production is performed, there is an advantage that the interest of the new song announcement production is not impaired by the normal production.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the island power supply device 500 with a plurality of pachinko gaming machines 1 installed on the same island in the pachinko hall with the individual power switch provided in each pachinko gaming machine 1 set to “ON”. By turning on the power supply (see FIG. 5), it is possible to simultaneously activate the plurality of pachinko gaming machines 1. For this reason, as described in this embodiment, the time condition based on the elapsed time from power-on (whether or not 1 hour has passed in this embodiment) is set to be the same for a plurality of pachinko gaming machines 1. As a result, it is possible to start a new song announcement effect simultaneously on a plurality of pachinko machines 1.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, since a new song announcement effect is announced in which a new song as unpublished content is announced, an effect that is more interesting than performing a specific effect using known content is performed. Is possible.

[Variation of the activation time for announcement announcement effect]
FIG. 73 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the relationship between the activation time of the announcement notice effect and the variation time of the special symbol. In the above embodiment, as illustrated in FIG. 73 (A), the announcement notice effect activation time is set to 1 minute, and the announcement notice effect is displayed when a fluctuating effect longer than 1 minute is performed. The case where the announcement announcement effect is not performed when the variation effect until the start time and the start time of the new song announcement effect does not develop has been described. Instead of this, the activation time of the announcement notice effect may be set to a time longer than the longest time of the variation time of the special symbol.

  With this configuration, if the start time of the announcement announcement effect is reached when the variation effect is being performed, the change effect will always end before the start time of the new song announcement effect. The time for performing the performance can be ensured.

[Modification of State Control Processing in Step S2200]
By the way, in the above embodiment, the case where the first new song announcement effect is executed when the new song announcement flag is set to “ON” while the announcement permission flag is set to “ON” has been described. The following problems may occur. That is, since the RTC information is used for controlling the presentation permission flag, there is a possibility that an error may occur between the aircraft with respect to the timing when the presentation permission flag is set to “ON”. On the other hand, for example, when the power of the island power supply device 500 is turned on at 8:00, as shown in FIG. While the flag is set to “ON”, in the 49th series, there is a possibility that the announcement permission flag is set to “ON” after 4 hours have elapsed since power-on. When such a situation occurs, the first new song announcement effect of the new song B is started when the 48th series has been turned on for 4 hours, whereas the 49th series has a 4 hour period since the power was turned on. As a result, a new song announcement effect for the new song A is started when the song has elapsed.

  Therefore, in order to prevent such a problem from occurring, instead of the presentation permission flag, the first permission similar to the presentation permission flag that is set to “ON” when the time indicated by the RTC information is exactly 12:00, for example. A flag and a second permission flag that is set to “ON” when the time indicated by the RTC information is, for example, 12:15, provided that both of these two flags are set to “ON”. The execution of the first new song announcement effect may be permitted. When this configuration is applied to the example described above based on FIG. 74A, both the 48th and 49th units have the first permission flag and the second permission flag set to “ ON "is set (see FIG. 74B). Therefore, when 4 hours have passed since the power was turned on, for example, a new song announcement effect for new song A was started on both units, and when 5 hours had passed since the power was turned on, the first new song announcement effect for new song B was started on both units. As a result, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of bending deviation.

[Modified example of display list creation table]
FIG. 75 is a schematic diagram of the all-mode table. In the above embodiment, when the first new song announcement effect of the new song is performed, the special selection for switching the display list creation table to be used is also performed in the state where all songs are released in order to newly cause the effect based on the new song to appear in the normal effect. The case of executing was described. On the other hand, as another embodiment, the display list is created using the all mode table in which the selection ratios of the production patterns of all new songs are set equal as shown in FIG. It may be. Thereby, it becomes possible to make the normal production based on each new song appear in a balanced manner.

[Second Embodiment]
Hereinafter, a second embodiment of the present invention will be described. In the first embodiment, for example, as illustrated in FIG. 7, the case where the normal effect image is reduced and displayed as necessary has been described. If the information contains relatively important information, it is better not to display it in a reduced size. Therefore, in the second embodiment, a case will be described in which a presentation announcement effect image or a new song announcement effect image is reduced and displayed instead of the normal effect image. Note that in the second embodiment, descriptions of configurations and processes common to the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment will be omitted, and differences from the first embodiment will be described.

  FIG. 76 is a screen diagram showing a state in which the announcement notice effect image displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 5 is reduced and displayed under a specific condition. As illustrated in FIG. 76, when the decorative symbol indicating that the determination result of the special symbol determination is a jackpot is stopped and displayed, the type of jackpot is notified and the player is notified prior to the opening of the big prize opening 13. On the other hand, an opening effect including a notification that prompts the user to make a right strike is performed. In this way, during the normal production informing the information that is relatively important to the player, the normal production image is continuously displayed in the entire area, and the announcement announcement production image is reduced and superimposed on the normal production image. . The same applies to the case where a new song announcement effect image is displayed.

  Note that FIG. 76 illustrates a state in which the announcement announcement effect image is reduced and displayed at the lower left of the display screen of the main liquid crystal display device 5, but the announcement announcement effect image or the new song announcement effect image is reduced and displayed on the screen. The position may be another position. However, if the announcement announcement effect image or the new song announcement effect image is displayed at the center of the screen or the display size of these images is too large, the normal effect tends to be hindered. For this reason, the display positions and display sizes of these effect images may be appropriate in consideration of the positions where decorative symbols, hold display images, various messages, and the like included in the normal effect images are displayed. desirable.

  FIG. 77 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a drawing process when displaying the announcement announcement effect image or the new song announcement effect image in a reduced size. When the announcement announcement effect image or the new song announcement effect image is reduced and superimposed on the normal effect image while the new song announcement effect is displayed on the full screen, the VDP 142 (see FIG. 12) executes the following processing in units of frames. . That is, as illustrated in FIG. 77, the VDP 142 draws the normal effect image in the full-screen frame buffer 1493, and reduces the reduced image obtained by scaling the announcement announcement effect image or the new song announcement effect image 1494. To draw.

  Next, the VDP 142 transfers the normal effect image drawn in the full screen frame buffer 1493 to the main liquid crystal frame buffer 1495, and transfers the reduced image drawn in the reduced image frame buffer 1494 to the main liquid crystal frame buffer 1495. To do. The VDP 142 outputs the two images thus stored in the main liquid crystal frame buffer 1495 to the main liquid crystal display device 5 together as RGB signals at a predetermined display timing. In addition, a notice effect image or an effect image related to the new song announcement effect is drawn in the sub liquid crystal frame buffer 1496 and output to the sub liquid crystal display device 6.

  FIG. 78 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the flow of other effects in the case where the variation effect accompanying the variation display of the special symbol becomes the start time of the new song announcement effect but does not end. If the start time of the announcement announcement effect is reached during execution of the variation effect accompanying the long variation such that the variation time of the special symbol exceeds 1 minute, the variation effect may not end even if the start time of the new song announcement effect is reached. In such a case, if the variation effect develops before the start time of the new song announcement effect, the announcement notice effect is started at the development timing as in the first embodiment (FIGS. 78A and 78B). B)). 78 (A) and 78 (B), the middle symbol including the character “S” in the middle row is pseudo-stopped after the reach is established, and the determination of the special symbol determination rather than the SP reach effect (so-called “super reach”). It is shown that the result is a SPSP reach production with a high degree of confidence that the result will be a big hit. As described above in the first embodiment, this SPSP reach effect may be based on the new song used for the new song announcement effect, and is performed when the reliability that is a big hit is relatively high. Therefore, there is a high possibility that the player will pay more attention than other effects. For this reason, it is not preferable to change the display area of the fluctuation effect. Therefore, in the second embodiment, at the above development timing, the announcement announcement effect is started in such a manner that the announcement announcement effect image is reduced and superimposed on the variation effect image without changing the display area of the variation effect image. (See FIG. 78 (B)).

  In the example shown in FIG. 78, the variation effect ends after the start time of the new song announcement effect. The final stage of the fluctuating effect is particularly important for notifying the determination result of the special symbol determination because an effect such as a cut-in notice in which the display mode changes according to the reliability that is a big hit is performed. For this reason, the new song announcement effect is started in a form in which the new song announcement effect image is reduced and superimposed on the change effect image without changing the display area of the change effect image even at the start time of the new song announcement effect ( (See FIG. 78C). Then, after the present variation effect is completed, the new song announcement effect is switched from the reduced display to the enlarged display in the upper area (see FIG. 78D).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 79, a display mode of these effects in the case of performing the announcement notice effect or the new song announcement effect during the long hit game or the short hit game will be described. Here, FIG. 79 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a display mode of the announcement announcement effect image or the new song announcement effect image during the hit effect.

  For example, during the opening of a long hit game, an opening effect is performed. As shown in FIGS. 76 (B) and 76 (C), this opening effect is an effect image for informing the type of jackpot or a right-handed strike. This includes the display of effect images. For this reason, when an announcement announcement effect or a new song announcement effect is performed during the opening effect, the opening announcement image or the new song announcement effect image is reduced while the opening effect image is displayed in the upper area. Is superimposed on the screen.

  In addition, for example, during the long-opening round game of the long hit game, an effect during the round is performed, but when the effect during the round is a normal mid-round effect that does not include the promotion effect, the announcement is announced during the long-opening round game. The effect image or the new song announcement effect image is displayed large in the entire area, and the image of the effect during the round is superimposed on one of these two images.

  In addition, when the effect during the round includes the promotion effect, the effect during the round is more important than the effect during the round that does not include the promotion effect. Is displayed in large size in the entire area, and the announcement announcement effect image or new song announcement effect image is reduced and superimposed.

  In addition, during a short open round game of short hit games, a short rush hit effect is performed as a short hit effect, which gives a player a sense of anticipation of entering the short-time game state. Because it is highly important to the player, during the short open round game, the image of the short time entry effect is displayed in the upper area, while the announcement announcement effect image or the new song announcement effect image is reduced to shorten the time entry effect. Is superimposed on the image.

  Also, for example, when performing announcement announcement effect or new song announcement effect during the ending of the game per long game, the ending effect performed during this ending is also as important to the player as the opening effect, so While the image is displayed largely in the upper area, the announcement announcement effect image or new song announcement effect image is reduced and superimposed on the ending effect image.

[Other variations]
In addition, this invention is not limited to the said embodiment, For example, the following forms may be sufficient. That is, in the above embodiment, the case where the start timing of the new song presentation effect is controlled based on the elapsed time based on the power-on time of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is described. The start timing of the new song announcement effect is controlled based on the elapsed time (the time the player is playing), or the game history such as the total number of times and the number of continuations of the special game The start timing of the new song announcement effect may be controlled based on the above.

  Further, in the above embodiment, the case where it is determined whether or not to start a new song announcement effect is described based on the elapsed time from power-on, but whether or not to start a new song announcement effect is determined by another method. You may make it do. For example, the set time is stored in the control ROM 144, it is determined whether or not the current time measured by the RTC 134 has reached the set time, and when it is determined that the set time has been reached, a new song presentation effect is started. Also good. According to this configuration, by setting the same set time for a plurality of pachinko gaming machines 1, if there is no deviation in the current time measured by each RTC 134 of each pachinko gaming machine 1, a plurality of pachinko gaming machines Regardless of whether or not the machine 1 is installed on the same island, it is possible to start a new song presentation effect simultaneously on a plurality of pachinko gaming machines 1.

  In the above embodiment, the case where the main liquid crystal display device 5 is used to execute the normal effect, the announcement announcement effect, and the new song announcement effect is described. However, at least one of these effects is performed using the sub liquid crystal display device 6. Or the main liquid crystal display device 5 and the sub liquid crystal display device 6 may be used.

  In the above-described embodiment, the case where the specific effect is a new song announcement effect that announces a new song as unreleased content has been described. However, the specific effect is an effect that announces unreleased content other than the new song (for example, a character). It may be an effect using known content.

  Further, in the above embodiment, the case where the present invention is applied to a one-type and two-type mixed pachinko gaming machine has been described as an example. It can be applied to other gaming machines.

  In addition, the configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the operation mode of each member described in the above embodiment are merely examples, and it goes without saying that the present invention can be realized with other configurations and operation modes. Further, the order of processing, the set value, the threshold value used for determination, etc. in the flowcharts described above are merely examples, and the present invention can be realized with other orders and values without departing from the scope of the present invention. Needless to say. Further, the screen diagrams and the like exemplified in the above embodiment are merely examples, and may be screens of other display modes.

  As another embodiment, the effect control board 130 may execute part of the processing executed in the image sound control board 140. Further, the effect control board 130 and the image sound control board 140 are integrally configured so that the process executed on the effect control board 130 and the process executed on the image sound control board 150 are executed by one control board. May be.

  In the above embodiment, the case where the pachinko gaming machine 1 includes the two liquid crystal display devices of the main liquid crystal display device 5 and the sub liquid crystal display device 6 has been described, but the present invention only includes the main liquid crystal display device 5. The present invention is also applicable to the pachinko gaming machine 1 that it has. Hereinafter, in order to describe a case where the sub liquid crystal display device 6 is not provided, the “main liquid crystal display device 5” is simply referred to as “liquid crystal display device 5”.

[Countdown display for new song announcement production]
In the first embodiment, the remaining time until the start of the new song announcement effect is counted down in the announcement announcement effect (see FIG. 6B), and the remaining time until the start time of the new song announcement effect is a predetermined time. The case has been described where two types of countdown display are performed in which the remaining time is displayed in a countdown display when the time is less than (see FIG. 9C). Instead, in another embodiment, the liquid crystal display device 5 may be used to perform three types of countdown displays: a first countdown display, a second countdown display, and a third countdown display described below. Good. Note that the three types of countdown displays are controlled by the overall CPU 141.

  FIG. 80 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the flow of three types of countdown displays related to a new song announcement effect. FIG. 81 is a screen diagram of the liquid crystal display device 5 showing a specific example of the first countdown display. FIG. 82 is a screen diagram of the liquid crystal display device 5 showing a specific example of the second countdown display. FIG. 83 is a screen diagram of the liquid crystal display device 5 showing a specific example of the third countdown display.

(First countdown display)
The first countdown display is a display effect in which the remaining time until the new song announcement effect is started is counted down on the liquid crystal display device 5 by a predetermined time before the start time of the new song announcement effect (for example, 60 seconds before).

  Since the first countdown display is ended, for example, 60 seconds before the new song presentation effect is started, the remaining time displayed by the first countdown display is at least 1 minute or more. For this reason, in the first countdown display, typically, the remaining time until the start of the new song announcement effect, such as “39 minutes until the new song announcement time” and “35 minutes until the new song announcement time”, is shown. It is counted down in units (see FIGS. 81A and 81B).

  In addition, the first countdown display is performed at least in a situation where the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in a customer waiting state. That is, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the customer waiting flag that indicates that the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the customer waiting state at the timing when the special symbol determination right is not held and the variation display of the special symbol is not performed. Is set to ON (step S323 in FIG. 21). At that time, a customer waiting command for notifying that the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in a customer waiting state is set in the main RAM 103 (step S322 in FIG. 21) and transmitted to the effect control board 130. On the other hand, the effect control board 130 transmits information notifying that it has shifted to the customer waiting state to the image sound control board 140. Then, in the image sound control board 140, it is determined whether or not the remaining time until the new song presentation effect is started is 1 minute or more. When it is determined that there is 1 minute or more, the first countdown display is started. (See FIG. 80A).

  Thus, as the first pattern, when the production control board 130 receives the customer waiting command, the first countdown display is provided on the condition that the remaining time until the new song presentation production is started is 1 minute or more. Be started.

  The first countdown display is performed when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in a customer waiting state as described above. For this reason, the first countdown display is ended when the customer waiting state is canceled. Specifically, the effect control board 130 can determine that the customer waiting state has been released based on the fact that the change start command is received first after receiving the customer waiting command, so the customer waiting state is released. When the information indicating the determination result is transmitted to the image sound control board 140, the first countdown display is terminated.

  Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, since the customer waiting effect is started when 30 seconds elapse after the effect control board 130 receives the customer waiting command, this customer waiting effect is started as the second pattern. At the same time, the first countdown display may be started (see FIG. 80B). Here, as the customer waiting effect, for example, a menu screen display for displaying a menu screen (see FIG. 81 (B)) for the player to select a desired operation item from the menu, a feature of the model, and the like. For example, movie playback that plays the introduction movie to be introduced. When the display of the menu screen is started at the timing when 30 seconds have elapsed since the reception of the customer waiting command, the image of the first countdown display is superimposed on the image of the menu screen (see FIG. 81B). The same applies to the case where the introductory movie starts to be played when 30 seconds have elapsed since the reception of the customer waiting command.

  The customer waiting effect may be such that only a menu screen is displayed when a predetermined time has elapsed since the reception of the customer waiting command. Alternatively, the introductory movie may only be played after a predetermined time has elapsed since the reception of the customer waiting command. In addition, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the reception of the customer waiting command, the introduction movie reproduction and the menu screen display may be alternately repeated. In this case, either the playback of the introduction movie or the display of the menu screen may be performed first.

  By the way, when any key of the effect key 27 is pressed while the menu screen is displayed, a sub-screen for performing various settings or playing a game (for example, fortune-telling) is displayed. FIG. 81C shows a volume adjustment screen that is displayed when the left key of the effect keys 27 is pressed. The first countdown display is displayed until such screen display is performed. If it does, there is a risk of hindering the player's operation (for example, volume adjustment operation). For this reason, the first countdown display is performed when the menu screen is displayed, while the first countdown display is not performed when the sub screen (volume adjustment screen or the like) transitioning from the menu screen is displayed. It is preferable to do.

(Second countdown display)
The second countdown display counts down the remaining time from the start of the new song announcement effect until the start time of the new song announcement effect in the liquid crystal display device 5 before the new song announcement effect is started (for example, 60 seconds before). This is a display effect to be displayed.

  Here, the second countdown display is a display effect that is started when, for example, the remaining time until the start of a new song announcement effect is 1 minute. For this reason, in the second countdown display, typically, the remaining time until the start of the new song presentation effect, such as “59 seconds until the new song announcement time” and “58 seconds until the new song announcement time”, is seconds. Countdown is performed in units (see FIGS. 82A and 82B).

  By the way, the second countdown display starts when the remaining time until the new song announcement effect starts is 1 minute, whereas the announcement announcement effect described in the first embodiment starts the new song announcement effect. The remaining time until the start is less than 1 minute, and starts at the switching timing of effects. For example, when the symbol is changing at the timing when the remaining time becomes 1 minute, the announcement announcement effect is started when the symbol control command for notifying the end of the symbol change is received by the effect control board 130. (See FIG. 80A). For this reason, the display mode of the second countdown display changes before and after the announcement notice effect is started. Specifically, a message such as “59 seconds until the new song announcement time” is displayed on the liquid crystal display until the announcement notice production starts after the remaining time until the new song announcement production starts. It is displayed in a small size in the band-like upper area on the display screen of the device 5 (see FIG. 82A). When the announcement announcement effect is started, a part of the message such as “until the new song announcement time” continues to be displayed in the upper area as it is, for example, the remaining part of the message such as “53 seconds remaining” (number of remaining seconds). ) Starts to be displayed in a larger central area than when it was displayed in the upper area (see FIG. 82B).

  In the first embodiment, when the announcement announcement effect is started, the variation effect including the variation display of the decorative symbol is performed in the lower region of the display screen. However, such a display region is described. The image display related to the announcement announcement effect or the second countdown display and the image display related to the variation effect may be performed in the same display area without changing the above. In this case, in order to suppress a decrease in the visibility of the image related to the game effect such as the decorative design, as illustrated in FIG. 82 (C), the image related to the announcement notice effect and the second countdown display is displayed. It is preferable to superimpose and display an image related to the game effect.

  However, if there is a game effect that is highly important to the player, such as an SPSP reach effect, and the game effect does not end by the start time of the new song announcement effect, the announcement announcement effect or the second countdown The display may not be performed.

  By the way, depending on the timing when the remaining time until the start of the new song announcement effect is 1 minute, the second countdown display may be performed when waiting for the customer, but this second countdown display is the new song announcement effect. Plays a role of notifying the start of the movie, and has a higher priority than the introduction movie described above. For this reason, for example, when the second countdown display is performed when it is time to start playback of the introduction movie, it is preferable to prohibit playback of the introduction movie. The same applies to the case where a third countdown display described later is performed.

(3rd countdown display)
The third countdown display is a display effect in which the remaining time until the new song announcement effect is ended is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 5 while the new song announcement effect is being executed.

  Here, the third countdown display is, for example, a display effect that is started when the start time of the new song announcement effect is reached. And the music reproduced in the new song announcement effect is typically reproduced over a period of about 3 to 7 minutes. In addition, it is preferable to notify the time as accurate as possible until the new song announcement effect ends. Therefore, in the third countdown display, the remaining time until the end of the new song presentation effect is counted down in units of seconds, such as “4 minutes 23 seconds” or “1 minute 48 seconds” (FIG. 83 (A) and (See (B)).

  Note that in the new song announcement effect, the music to be played may be different, such as new song A, new song B, and new song C. For this reason, the remaining time that is initially displayed in the third countdown display varies depending on the length of the song used for the new song announcement effect. On the other hand, instead of the new song announcement effect, for example, when the player performs an effect of playing a game using the effect button 26 or the effect key 27 for a predetermined time (for example, 5 minutes), The remaining time that is initially displayed in the three countdown display is basically fixed to a predetermined time or a time that is one second less than the predetermined time (for example, 4 minutes 59 seconds).

  In addition, when the start time of the specific effect is reached, for example, the SPSP reach effect is being performed, and when the specific effect is performed after the completion of the SPSP reach effect, the specific effect is immediately started when the start time of the specific effect is reached. It may be necessary to shorten the time during which the specific performance is performed, as compared with the case where it is performed. In such a case, the third countdown display may be performed regarding the time from the end of the SPSP reach effect until the end time of the specific effect. However, if the specific effect cannot be started immediately even after the start time of the specific effect, the time period for which the specific effect is performed is not shortened by delaying the start of the specific effect. You may employ | adopt the structure which shifts as it is. In this case, the remaining time that is initially displayed in the third countdown display is the same as the case where the specific effect starts immediately when the specific effect reaches the start time.

  By the way, when a new song announcement effect is performed as a specific effect, it is preferable to perform a new song announcement effect simultaneously with the adjacent pachinko gaming machine 1 as described in the first embodiment. On the other hand, for example, if only one of the plurality of pachinko gaming machines 1 installed on the same island is prevented from performing the new song announcement effect, the effect of the new song announcement effect may be reduced. The same applies to the case where a specific effect other than the new song announcement effect is performed. For this reason, the specific effect and the third countdown display during the specific effect include whether or not the decorative symbol is being displayed, whether or not the decorative symbol is being stopped, whether the customer is waiting, Regardless of whether the screen is being displayed, whether the sub-screen is being displayed, whether the introductory movie is being played back, etc., it is performed in all situations. Since the third countdown display is performed during the new song announcement effect, the remaining time indicated by the third countdown display is considered to be more important for the player than the remaining time indicated by the first countdown display. It is done. For this reason, the remaining time indicated by the third countdown display is displayed slightly larger than the remaining time indicated by the first countdown display.

  In addition, during the new song presentation effect, for example, as illustrated in FIG. 83 (A), for example, a message “New song announcement effect is in progress” and a remaining time display by a third countdown display such as “4 minutes 23 seconds” are included. A band-shaped effect image is displayed in the upper area of the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 5. This band-shaped effect image is displayed in the same manner (for example, at the same position and in the same size) when the first countdown display or the second countdown display is performed, although the contents of the message included are different (FIG. 81). And FIG. 82). That is, during the first countdown display, during the second countdown display, and during the third countdown display, the same band-shaped effect image as that displayed during the new song presentation effect is displayed in common. For this reason, when the first to third countdown displays are performed, the player easily recognizes that the remaining time indicated by the countdown display indicates the remaining time related to the new song announcement effect. be able to.

[Effects of countdown display]
As is clear from the above description, the remaining time until the specific effect is started is notified by the first countdown display or the second countdown display. For this reason, the player can easily grasp when the specific effect starts. In addition, since the first countdown display is performed while waiting for a customer, a player who is not playing a game grasps when the specific effect starts by looking at the remaining time indicated by the first countdown display. After that, it is possible to decide whether or not to play a game with the pachinko gaming machine 1. In addition, since the remaining time until the specific effect ends is notified by the third countdown display, the player can easily grasp when the specific effect ends. Therefore, the player can easily grasp the schedule of the specific performance.

[Display control and suggestion during new song presentation]
In the first embodiment, the case where the notification effect regarding the new song announcement effect is performed using the sub liquid crystal display device 6 is described (see FIG. 9), but the general CPU 141 executes the specific effect (for example, the new song announcement effect). Moreover, you may make it make the liquid crystal display device 5 perform the suggestion effect which suggests the content of the new music announcement effect. This suggestion effect can be realized, for example, by a serif notice effect that is performed while the decorative symbol is variably displayed. Specifically, when a predetermined time elapses after the decorative symbol variation display is started, an effect button 26 that prompts the player to press the effect button 26 together with a character A line such as “What is the next new song?”. And a gauge image for informing the remaining time during which the operation of the effect button 26 is effective are displayed on the liquid crystal display device 5 (see FIG. 84A). During the effective period in which the operation of the effect button 26 is valid, the button lamp built in the effect button 26 emits light.

  On the other hand, when the player presses the effect button 26 during the effective period (until the remaining time indicated by the gauge image becomes zero), a character such as “It is a new song B” under the character A dialogue box. A dialogue box of B is displayed (see FIG. 84B).

  In another example, a button image and a gauge image are displayed on the liquid crystal display device together with the character A's dialogue frame such as “Who will sing the next new song?” When a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the decorative symbol variation display. 5 (see FIG. 84C). During the effective period in which the operation of the effect button 26 is valid, the button lamp built in the effect button 26 emits light.

  On the other hand, when the player presses the effect button 26 during the effective period (until the remaining time indicated by the gauge image becomes zero), the character B such as “Ms. M” appears under the character A line. Are displayed (see FIG. 84D).

  Thus, since the liquid crystal display device 5 is basically used for a game effect such as a variable effect, it is preferable to execute a part of the game effect as a suggestive effect. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, data related to the image sound control in the image sound control board 140 is transmitted to the effect control board 130. For example, the sub CPU 131 uses the data related to the image sound control (eg, data related to the notification effect). This can be realized by specifying the next new song announcement effect based on the result and setting the variation effect pattern in consideration of the specified result.

  Here, the case where the suggestion effect is performed using the liquid crystal display device 5 has been described, but the suggestion effect may be performed using the speaker 24 instead of the liquid crystal display device 5. Further, the suggestion effect may be performed using both the liquid crystal display device 5 and the speaker 24.

  On the other hand, a game effect image can be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 5 regardless of whether or not it is within the image display period of the new song announcement effect (see, for example, FIGS. 6C and 6D). On the other hand, if a configuration in which one of the image of the new song announcement effect and the image of the game effect is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 5 is adopted, both the game effect and the new song announcement effect are displayed. For a player who is looking forward, there is a risk that interest will be lost. Further, if the images of both effects are simply displayed on the liquid crystal display device 5 in parallel, the effects are hardly utilized.

  Therefore, when the new song announcement effect image and the game effect image are displayed on the liquid crystal display device 5 at the same time, part or all of the game effect image to be displayed when the new song announcement effect image is not displayed. Is preferably not displayed. Specifically, when an image of a new song announcement effect is not displayed, for example, a background image, a decorative pattern, a hold display image, a character, an item, and the like are displayed on the liquid crystal display device 5 as an image of a game effect. On the other hand, when the image of the new song announcement effect is displayed, the area where the image of the game effect is displayed is changed from the entire area to the lower area (see FIGS. 6A and 6C). As a result, the area for displaying the game effect image is reduced, so it is preferable to simplify the game effect image. Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, when an image of a new song announcement effect is displayed, the decorative symbols are displayed in dots and the display of characters and items is prohibited. Here, as an element image constituting an image of the game effect, the display of characters and items is prohibited, and the display of other element images is not prohibited. Other element images (for example, decorative designs and hold display images) This is because the player shows more important information by the player than the character or item.

  Such prohibition control during the new song announcement effect is realized by switching the display list creation table (see FIG. 37) from the default table or the main table of the new songs A to L to the dot effect table, for example. Is possible.

  Also, here, when a new song announcement effect image and a game effect image are displayed at the same time, a part of the game effect image to be displayed when the new song announcement effect image is not displayed is displayed. As described above, in another embodiment, display control may be performed so as not to display all of the game effect image to be displayed when the new song announcement effect image is not displayed.

[Effects of display control and suggestion during new song presentation]
Thus, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, when displaying the game effect image and the new song announcement effect image on the liquid crystal display device 5 at the same time, either one of the images is displayed or both the images are arranged in parallel. Display a new song announcement effect image, rather than displaying the new song announcement effect image partly or entirely of the game effect image compared to the case where the new song announcement effect is not performed. Display control that does not display is performed. Further, before the new song announcement effect is executed, a suggestion effect suggesting the content of the new song announcement effect is performed. Therefore, the player can enjoy the game while enjoying both the image display of the game effect and the image display of the new song announcement effect.

[Change control 1 for specific effects]
In the pachinko machine 1, the new song announcement effect is performed when one hour elapses from the time when the power is turned on or the start time of the previous new song announcement effect. Then, after all songs are released, the music used for the new song announcement effect is changed every time the new song announcement effect is performed (see FIG. 43). Specifically, each time a new song announcement effect is performed, both the effect image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 5 and the effect sound output from the speaker 24 regarding the new song announcement effect are changed.

  In addition, as described in the first embodiment, the change control related to the new song announcement effect is such that the overall CPU 141 determines a song to be used for the new song announcement effect with reference to the announcement order management table illustrated in FIG. It is realized by doing. On the other hand, in other embodiments, the control CPU 145 stores information indicating the type of new song used by the general CPU 141 for the previous new song announcement effect in the control RAM 145, and when executing the next new song announcement effect, the control RAM 145 is used. The type of the new song used for the previous new song announcement effect may be specified based on the information stored in the information, and a new song different from the specified new song may be determined as the new song used for the next new song announcement effect.

  In addition, when performing a specific effect different from the new song announcement effect, a part of the specific effect may be changed. Specifically, when the specific effect is executed, an effect image of the specific effect is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 5 and an effect sound of the specific effect is output from the speaker 24, so that the specific effect is executed. Each time, the effect control of changing the effect image of the specific effect may be performed without changing the effect sound of the specific effect. Further, every time a specific effect is executed, change control may be performed so as to change the effect sound of the specific effect without changing the effect image of the specific effect. Moreover, you may make it perform change control which repeats alternately the image change control which changes the effect image of a specific effect, and the effect sound change control which changes the effect sound of a specific effect.

[Operational effects of change control 1]
As is apparent from the description so far, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, since a part or all of the specific effect is changed every time the specific effect is executed, the specific effect is repeated by repeating the specific effect of the same content. It can suppress that interest is impaired.

[Change control 2 for specific effects]
In the first embodiment, the current date indicated by the RTC 134 and the type of new song corresponding to the elapsed time since power-on are read from the presentation order management table (see FIG. 43), so that the new song used for the new song announcement effect is read. The case of determining the type has been described. Instead of this, the production content of the specific production including the new song announcement production may be set as follows. That is, for example, the overall CPU 141 determines whether or not the current date and time indicated by the RTC 134 has passed a specific date and time stored in the control ROM 142. And when it determines with not having passed the specific date, the production content of a specific production is set to the 1st production content. Conversely, when it is determined that the specific date and time has passed, the production content of the specific production is set as the second production content. Here, if the specific production is a new song announcement production, the new song to be used for the new song announcement production is set as the new song A if the specific date has not passed, and the new song to be used for the new song announcement production if the specific date has passed. Is set to the new song B.

  In addition, as control which changes the production content of a specific production, performing control which changes the character used for a specific production is considered. For example, if the current date and time indicated by the RTC 134 has not passed the specific date and time, the effect content of the specific effect is set to the specific effect in which the character A appears, and if the specific date and time has passed, the effect content of the specific effect is set to the character B. Control to set the specific effect that appears. Such control includes, for example, a specific date and time, one or more character types that appear when the specific date and time are not exceeded, and one or more characters that appear when the specific date and time are exceeded. This can be realized by storing a time table in which the types are associated with each other in the control ROM 142.

[Operational effects of change control 2]
As is clear from the description so far, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, if the specific date and time have not passed, the production content of the specific production is set as the first production content, and if the specific date and time has passed, the production of the specific production is The production content is set to the second production content. For this reason, for a player who played a game both before and after a specific date and time, the content of the effect of the specific effect will change, and the specific effect of the same effect will be repeated. It can be effectively suppressed that the interest of the declining.

[Selective control]
In the first embodiment, when a music selection screen display command is transmitted from the effect control board 130, the overall CPU 141 identifies the latest song used for the new song announcement effect, and has already been released including the identified latest song. A case has been described in which a music selection screen on which all new songs can be selected is displayed and the selected music is played back (see FIG. 59). As described above, in the first embodiment, when a predetermined condition that the first new song announcement effect is performed is satisfied, it is used for the first new song announcement effect during the jackpot game after the condition is satisfied. In addition, any one of a plurality of types of selection effects including a predetermined effect of reproducing the latest song is accepted, and the accepted selection effect is executed. For this reason, every time a first new song announcement effect is performed, selectable new songs increase.

  On the other hand, in another embodiment, a predetermined enemy character (hereinafter referred to as “enemy character”) appears and battles with a character (hereinafter referred to as “own character”) previously selected by the player, for example. The special design that indicates that the character has defeated the enemy character and the special symbol indicating that it was determined to be a big win was stopped and displayed. In the jackpot game to be performed subsequently, a configuration may be adopted in which an enemy character defeated by the own character can be selected as the own character. The enemy characters appearing in the specific effect are changed each time the specific effect is performed, or the number of the characters is increased or decreased.

  In this case, it is preferable that the pachinko gaming machine 1 is configured as a one-type pachinko gaming machine instead of a one-type two-type mixed pachinko gaming machine. In this type of pachinko gaming machine, if the result of the first special symbol determination is a big hit and a big hit game is played, after the big hit game is finished, it is “probable gaming state” or “short-time gaming state”. The game is controlled. Here, the “probability game state” has a higher probability of being determined to be a big win in the second special symbol determination (or the first special symbol determination) than in the normal gaming state, and the second special symbol determination. This is a gaming state in which a so-called electric chew support function that makes it easy for a game ball to win a prize is given to the start opening (second start opening 12). In addition, the “short-time gaming state” has the same probability of being determined to be a big win in the second special symbol determination (or the first special symbol determination) as in the normal gaming state. This is a gaming state given for a predetermined period. Note that when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is configured as one type of pachinko gaming machine 1, the specific area 9 (see FIG. 3) is unnecessary.

  When performing a specific effect in which the player character and the enemy character perform a battle, specifically, a process illustrated in FIG. 85 is performed. Here, FIG. 85 is a flowchart showing an example of the selection effect control process executed in the image sound control board 140.

  The overall CPU 141 first determines whether or not a specific effect is being executed (step S3101). If it is determined that the specific effect is not being executed (step S3101: NO), the process proceeds to step S3106 described later.

  When determining that the specific effect is being executed (step S3101: YES), the overall CPU 141 determines whether or not the variable effect start command transmitted from the effect control board 130 has been received (step S3102). Here, if it is determined that the variation effect start command has not been received (step S3102: NO), the process proceeds to step S3106.

  When determining that the variation effect start command has been received (step S3102: YES), the general CPU 141 starts the variation effect start command related to the jackpot based on the information included in the received variation effect start command. It is determined whether it is a command (step S3103). Here, if it is determined that the command is not a variation effect starter command related to the jackpot (step S3103: NO), the process proceeds to step S3106.

  If the overall CPU 141 determines that the change effect start command related to the jackpot (step S3103: YES), it updates selectable character information (hereinafter referred to as “selectable character information”) stored in the control RAM 145. (Step S3104). Specifically, in the control RAM 145, a selectable character indicating a character that can be selected by the player as the player's own character appearing in the battle performance performed in the probability variation game state (or short-time game state) after the jackpot game ends. Information is stored. If the overall CPU 141 determines that the command is a variable effect start command related to a jackpot, it updates the selectable character information so that the enemy character defeated in the specific effect is added to the character indicated by the selectable character information. .

  The overall CPU 141 produces a command instructing display of a character selection screen (hereinafter referred to as “character selection screen”) for the player to select his / her character appearing in the battle production after the jackpot game during the jackpot game. It is determined whether or not a character selection screen display instruction has been received based on whether or not it has been received from the control board 130 (step S3106). If it is determined that the character selection screen display instruction has been received (step S3106: YES), the character selection screen is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 5 (step S3107). Although not shown in the figure, the character selection screen displays, for example, a list of characters indicated by selectable character information so that the player can select them.

  If the overall CPU 141 executes the process of step S3107 or determines that there is no instruction to display the character selection screen (step S3106: NO), it determines whether or not the character selection screen is being displayed (step S3108). ). If it is determined that the character selection screen is not being displayed (step S3108: NO), the series of selection effect control processing ends, and the process returns to step S3101.

  If the overall CPU 141 determines that the character selection screen is being displayed (step S3108: YES), the overall CPU 141 performs a selection operation for selecting one of a plurality of characters included in the character selection screen as the player character. It is determined whether or not (step S3109). Specifically, for example, information indicating that the center key of the effect key 27 has been pressed is displayed from the effect control board 130 in a state in which an image indicating any character included in the character selection screen is highlighted. It is determined whether or not it has been received.

  When determining that the selection operation has not been performed (step S3109: NO), the overall CPU 141 determines whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the character selection screen display (step S3110). Here, when it is determined that the predetermined time has not elapsed (step S3110: NO), the series of selection effect control processing ends, and the processing returns to step S3101.

  If the overall CPU 141 determines that a selection operation has been performed (step S3109: YES), or determines that a predetermined time has elapsed (step S3110: YES), the overall CPU 141 executes its own character setting process (step S3111). Specifically, when the player performs a selection operation, the setting information for setting the highlighted character as the player character is set in the control RAM 145, or when a predetermined time has elapsed. A process of setting setting information for setting the highlighted character as the own character in the control RAM 145 is executed. The character selection screen is displayed during a specific round game in the jackpot game (for example, during the third round game). For this reason, in another embodiment, it is not triggered by the elapse of a predetermined time from the start of display of the character selection screen, but a round notifying that a specific round game has ended, that is, a specific round game has ended. When the end command is received by the effect control board 130, the player character setting process may be performed.

  As described above, when the predetermined condition related to the specific performance that is a big hit during the specific performance is satisfied, the general CPU 141 defeats the own character in the specific performance during the jackpot game after the predetermined condition is satisfied. One of a plurality of types of battle effects including a battle effect (an example of a predetermined effect) performed with the enemy character as the own character is accepted, and the battle effect that received the selection is executed.

[Effects of selection effect control]
In this way, when a predetermined condition related to a specific effect is satisfied, a predetermined effect corresponding to the specific effect (in the above example, an effect of playing the latest song, an enemy character that has been defeated as the player's own character) (Battle production performed) can be selected. For this reason, it can contribute to the improvement of the production effect of a selection production by performing a specific production.

[Direction control of each production]
FIG. 86 is an explanatory diagram for describing a production mode of each production. In FIG. 86, “liquid crystal display device” corresponds to the liquid crystal display device 5, “speaker” corresponds to the speaker 24, and “lamp” corresponds to the frame lamp 25. In the figure, “◯” means that the corresponding effect means is used, “△” means that the corresponding effect means is used negatively, and “×” indicates the corresponding effect means. This means that no means are used.

  As illustrated in FIG. 86, the pachinko gaming machine 1 has three modes: a normal mode, a customer waiting mode, and a power saving mode. Here, the normal mode is a state in which a game is being played by the player. The customer waiting mode is a state in which no game is played by the player, and as a customer waiting effect, a menu screen is displayed, an introduction movie is reproduced, and the like. The power saving mode is a state in which no game is played by the player, and is a mode in which the power consumption of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is suppressed as compared to the normal mode and the customer waiting mode.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1, when a customer waiting command is transmitted from the game control board 100 in the normal mode, the pachinko gaming machine 1 shifts to the customer waiting mode, and when a predetermined time (for example, 30 minutes) elapses after shifting to the customer waiting mode. Transition from customer waiting mode to power saving mode.

  As illustrated in FIG. 86, when the state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the normal mode, a game effect such as a variable effect using all of the three effect means of the liquid crystal display device 5, the speaker 24, and the frame lamp 25. Is done. The same applies to specific effects such as new song announcement effects.

  Thus, during the normal mode in which the game effect is being executed, the specific effect is executed in the first effect mode in which all of the three effect means of the liquid crystal display device 5, the speaker 24, and the frame lamp 25 are used. Is done.

  However, when the game effect and the specific effect are performed simultaneously, the frame lamp 25 cannot be used for both effects. Therefore, the frame lamp 25 is used for any one of the effects according to the priority of the game effect and the specific effect. The speaker 24 may be controlled in the same manner as the frame lamp 25, but both the effect sound of the game effect and the effect sound of the specific effect may be output simultaneously. In the normal mode, since the customer waiting flag is set to “OFF”, the customer waiting effect is not performed.

  In the customer waiting mode, the customer waiting flag is set to “ON” and the game controlled by the game control board 100 is not progressing. For this reason, as illustrated in FIG. 86, the liquid crystal display device 5, the speaker 24, and the frame lamp 25 are not used for the game effect. In this customer waiting mode, when, for example, 30 seconds elapses after a customer waiting command is transmitted from the game control board 100, a customer waiting effect such as playing an introduction movie or displaying a menu screen is performed. This customer waiting effect may be performed using all three effect means of the liquid crystal display device 5, the speaker 24, and the frame lamp 25 as illustrated in FIG. 86, but only the liquid crystal display device 5 is used. May be used.

  In addition, the specific effect may be performed using all of the three effect means, but since it is a waiting mode in which a game is not performed (the possibility that the player is not seated), The necessity to use the liquid crystal display device 5 is low. For this reason, for the specific effect in the customer waiting mode, it is preferable to use, for example, two effect means such as the speaker 24 and the frame lamp 25 or one of the two effect means.

  The power saving mode is a mode in which a game is not started even after a considerable time (for example, 30 minutes) has elapsed since the transition to the customer waiting mode. As described above, since no game is performed in the power saving mode, as shown in FIG. 86, a game effect using the three effect means of the liquid crystal display device 5, the speaker 24, and the frame lamp 25 is performed. There is no. In addition, since the possibility that the player is not seated is higher than that in the customer waiting mode, for the customer waiting effect, for example, a message such as “power saving” in a state where the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 5 is blacked out. The speaker 24 and the frame lamp 25 are not used in order to perform only the display and suppress power consumption.

  By the way, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the power saving mode, it is conceivable to adopt a configuration in which not only a game effect but also a specific effect is not performed. However, if such a configuration is adopted, the power consumption of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be suppressed, but there is a possibility that a sufficient performance effect due to the specific performance cannot be obtained. Specifically, in the configuration in which the new song announcement effect as described in the first embodiment is performed simultaneously with the adjacent pachinko gaming machine 1 as the specific effect, the specific effect is completely performed in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the power saving mode. Otherwise, when looking over the island where these gaming machines are installed, the player can easily see that the frame lamp 25 does not emit light only in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the power saving mode. As a result, there is a risk that the effect of the specific effect will be reduced.

  Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the specific effect is performed using only the frame lamp 25 during the power saving mode in which no game effect is executed. That is, during the power saving mode, the specific effect is performed in a more negative effect mode than during the normal mode.

  Here, a configuration is employed in which the production sound of the specific effect is not output from the speaker 24 in the power saving mode. However, when such a configuration is adopted, for example, all the pachinko gaming machines 1 installed on the same island are used. Compared to the case where the production sound of the specific effect is simultaneously output from the speaker 24, the power of the specific effect is lost, and as a result, the effect of the specific effect may be reduced. For this reason, during the power saving mode, the specific effect may be performed using the two effect means of the frame lamp 25 and the speaker 24.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1, information necessary for specifying which mode the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in is transmitted from the game control board 100 to the image sound control board 140 and the lamp control board 150 via the effect control board 130. Sent. On the other hand, the overall CPU 141 identifies the current mode based on the information received via the effect control board 130, and uses the liquid crystal display device 5 and the speaker 24 for each effect based on the identification result. Control as you did. Further, the CPU of the lamp control board 150 identifies the current mode based on the information received via the effect control board 130, and based on the identification result, the use of the frame lamp 25 for each effect is as described above. Control.

[Effects of effect control of each effect]
As is apparent from the above description, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, during the power saving mode in which no game is performed, the specific effect is executed in a more negative effect mode than in the normal mode. For this reason, it is possible to execute an effective performance while suppressing power consumption by the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  In addition, although the case where the production mode of the specific production is switched from the first production mode to the second production mode by reducing the number of production means used for the specific production is described here, in other embodiments, For example, the brightness of the liquid crystal display device 5 that displays an image of a specific effect is reduced, or the volume of the effect sound of the specific effect output from the speaker 24 is decreased without changing the number of effect means used for the specific effect. Alternatively, the effect mode may be switched by lowering the brightness of the frame lamp 25.

[Priority control for specific effects]
In the first embodiment, the game effect and the new song announcement are displayed by displaying the image of the game effect in the lower area of the display screen while displaying the image of the new song announcement effect in the upper area of the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 5. The case where an effect (an example of a specific effect) is executed simultaneously has been described (see, for example, FIG. 6C). Thereby, it is possible to improve the interest of the production by the synergistic effect of the game production and the new song announcement production. However, for example, a new song is released when a predetermined game effect that is highly important for the player is performed, such as an SPSP reach effect indicating that the reliability for the jackpot is relatively high or a promotion effect during the round performed during the jackpot game. If the production is performed, there is a risk that the entertainment of the production will be lost.

  Therefore, when a predetermined effect is executed as a game effect, it is preferable to give priority to the predetermined effect over the new song announcement effect.

  FIG. 87 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the flow of effects when the SPSP reach effect does not end even when the start time of the new song announcement effect is reached.

  As illustrated in FIG. 87, when the start time of the announcement notice effect is reached, a variation effect as a game effect is performed, and even if this change effect reaches the start time of the new song announcement effect, it does not end. In such a case, it is preferable not to perform the announcement notice effect or the second countdown display (see FIGS. 87A to 87B). In the example shown in FIG. 87, the SPSP reach effect (development effect) is started after the symbol “S” is pseudo-stopped as the middle symbol. This SPSP reach production is a predetermined game production that is highly important for the player. For this reason, when the SPSP reach production does not end even when the start time of the new song announcement production, in order to give priority to the SPSP reach production over the new song announcement production, the new song announcement production will be performed after the SPSP reach production has ended. Is controlled (see FIGS. 87C and 87D).

[Operational effects by priority control of specific effects]
Thus, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, since the game effect and the new song announcement effect may be executed at the same time, it is possible to improve the interest of the effect due to the synergistic effect of these effects. On the other hand, when the game effect is a predetermined game effect, the predetermined game effect is given priority over the new song announcement effect. For this reason, it is possible to effectively suppress the new song announcement effect being performed when the predetermined game effect is being performed, and the interest of the predetermined game effect being impaired by the new song announcement effect.

  In addition, when a predetermined game effect is started during execution of the new song announcement effect, the new song announcement effect being executed may be interrupted and the predetermined game effect may be started. Further, in order to give priority to a predetermined game effect over a new song announcement effect, display control may be performed such that an image of a predetermined game effect is superimposed on an image of a new song announcement effect.

[Control of first countdown display]
By the way, as described above based on FIG. 80, the first countdown display that displays the remaining time until the start of the new song announcement effect is performed, so that the player is raised with respect to the fact that the new song announcement effect is performed. It is considered possible to hold them. However, if the first countdown display is performed until the player is performing the volume adjustment operation in the customer waiting state, the countdown display may interfere with the operation by the player. In addition, since the first countdown display is performed one minute or more before the start time of the new song announcement effect, it is not necessary to perform the first countdown display until the player is performing the above operation.

  Therefore, the general CPU 141 automatically switches to the first sub-screen (for example, today's screen) that is shifted by pressing any one of the effect key 27 while the menu screen or the menu screen is being displayed. When the sub-screen regarding fortune-telling is displayed, the first countdown display on the liquid crystal display device 5 is performed (see FIG. 81B), while any key of the effect key 27 is displayed while the menu screen is displayed. When a second sub-screen (for example, a sub-screen related to volume adjustment) that is shifted by pressing is displayed, the first countdown display in the liquid crystal display device 5 is not performed (FIG. 81C). reference).

  Note that the first countdown display is performed when the first sub-screen is displayed because the first sub-screen basically requires no operation with the effect button 26 or the effect key 27. This is because it is a display screen. In addition, the first countdown display is not performed when the second sub screen is displayed because the second sub screen is operated by the effect button 26 or the effect key 27 (for example, volume adjustment operation). This is because of the display screen that requires.

[Operational effect by controlling the first countdown display]
In this way, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the first countdown display is performed when the menu screen or the first sub-screen is displayed in the customer waiting state, so that, for example, a player who is not playing a game can produce a new song presentation effect. Can easily recognize when is started. On the other hand, since the first countdown display is not performed when the second sub-screen is displayed in the customer waiting state, it effectively suppresses the first countdown display from interfering with the input by the player. Can do.

  In other embodiments, the first countdown display may be controlled according to the importance of the effect image displayed in the customer waiting state. Specifically, when an effect image that is less important for the player is displayed in the customer waiting state, the first countdown display is performed, while an effect image that is more important for the player is displayed in the customer waiting state. If it is, the first countdown display is not performed.

[Specific production control during notification production]
Although not shown in the figure, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, a notification effect for notifying the player of specific information is performed. Specifically, the liquid crystal display device displays a message such as “Please be careful about forgetting to take a prepaid card or theft” on the liquid crystal display device 5, and the company name and company logo of the manufacturer that manufactured the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the notification effect displayed in 5 is an effect performed in the ending period of the jackpot game. Introductory movies that are played back in the customer waiting state may consist of a flow of, for example, displaying a company name or a company logo and then playing a video explaining the model. In this case, a part of the introduction movie ( The company name and the company logo are also displayed).

  The notification effect is not limited to that performed using the liquid crystal display device 5, and may be performed using rendering means other than the liquid crystal display device 5 (for example, the speaker 24). The notification effect may be performed using a plurality of effect means (for example, the liquid crystal display device 5 and the speaker 24). As a notification effect using the liquid crystal display device 5 and the speaker 24, a left-handed notification that prompts the player to make a left strike (output of a message such as “Please aim left”), a right-handed notification that prompts the player to make a right strike ( Output a message such as “Please aim right”).

  By the way, by performing a game effect and a specific effect such as a new song announcement effect at the same time as described above, the effect of the effect can be effectively enhanced by the synergistic effect of these effects. However, if the specific effect is actively performed while the notification effect as described above is being performed, there is a possibility that the necessary information cannot be appropriately notified to the player.

  For this reason, for example, the general CPU 141 causes a game effect and a specific effect to be executed simultaneously on the liquid crystal display device 5 (see, for example, FIG. 78C), but when the notification effect is executed, the general effect is notified more than the specific effect. Perform priority control to prioritize production. An example of the priority control is display control such that the image of the specific effect is not displayed (or the image of the specific effect is not drawn) while the image of the notification effect is displayed. For example, when the start time of the specific effect is reached during the image display of the notification effect, the image display of the specific effect is started after the image display of the notification effect ends. Also, when the start time of the notification effect is reached during the image display of the specific effect, the image display of the specific effect is interrupted and the image display of the notification effect is started.

  In addition, during image display of the notification effect, display control such that the image display of the notification effect and the image display of the specific effect are performed simultaneously, and the visibility of the image display of the notification effect is made higher than that of the image display of the specific effect. Is another example.

[Operational effects by specific production control during notification production]
Thus, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, since the game effect and the specific effect may be executed at the same time, the effect of the effect can be effectively enhanced by the synergistic effect of these effects. On the other hand, when the notification effect is executed, the notification effect is given priority over the specific effect, so that it is possible to prevent the specific information from being appropriately notified to the player by the specific effect. .

[Start timing control for specific effects]
The pachinko gaming machine 1 can simultaneously execute a variation effect as a game effect and a specific effect (new song announcement effect) (see, for example, FIG. 78C), and a round effect as a game effect. It is also possible to execute a specific performance at the same time. For this reason, it is possible to perform an effective production by the synergistic effect of the game production and the specific production.

  By the way, in the first embodiment, when the start time of the specific effect (new song announcement effect) is reached, the specific effect is immediately started regardless of whether the design is changing or whether the game is in a round game. The case has been described (see FIG. 49). Thereby, it is possible to simultaneously start specific effects in a plurality of pachinko gaming machines 1 installed on the same island.

  However, such a configuration may cause the following problems. That is, if a specific effect is started when a variation effect is being performed as a game effect, for example, the player's consciousness will be directed to the specific effect. There is a risk of damage. The same applies to the case where the specific effect is started when the effect during the round is performed as the game effect.

  Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, when the changing effect is performed at the start time of the specific effect (when the symbol is changing), after the changing effect ends (after the symbol change ends). When a specific effect is started and an effect during the round is being performed at the start time of the specific effect (when a round game is in progress), the effect during the round ends (after the round game ends) A specific performance is started.

  Hereinafter, the trigger for starting the specific effect will be described with reference to FIG. Here, FIG. 88 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the trigger for starting the specific effect.

  The overall CPU 141 determines whether or not the specific production start time has come. This determination may be a determination as to whether or not the elapsed time has reached one hour, as in step S2104 in FIG. 39, or whether or not the current date and time indicated by the RTC 134 has reached a predetermined date and time. It may be a determination.

  If the overall CPU 141 determines that the start time of the specific effect has come, it starts the specific effect. At that time, it is determined whether or not the changing effect is being performed. If the changing effect is being performed, the specific effect is started after the changing effect is ended. Specifically, the specific effect is started when one of the following commands is received by the effect control board 130.

  For example, the overall CPU 141 starts the specific effect when the effect control board 130 receives a symbol confirmation command for instructing the end of the changing effect being executed (see FIG. 88). Further, the overall CPU 141 may start the specific effect when the effect control board 130 receives the change start command instructing the start of the change effect next to the change effect being executed (see FIG. 88). This control is preferably performed, for example, when the special symbol determination is suspended at the end of the variation effect being executed.

  In addition, the general CPU 141 waits for a customer when a symbol waiting command is received next to the symbol determination command after the symbol control command is received by the effect control board 130 for instructing the end of the variation effect being executed. A specific effect may be started upon reception of a command (see FIG. 88). This control is preferably performed, for example, when the special symbol determination is not suspended at the end of the variation effect being executed.

  On the other hand, the control when the start time of the specific effect is reached during the round game is as follows. That is, if the overall CPU 141 determines that the start time of the specific effect is reached, the general CPU starts the specific effect. At that time, it is determined whether or not an effect during the round is being performed. If the effect during the round is being performed, the specific effect is started after the effect during the round is completed. Specifically, the specific effect is started when one of the following commands is received by the effect control board 130.

  The overall CPU 141 starts the specific effect, for example, when the effect control board 130 receives a round end command for instructing the end of the in-round effect being executed (see FIG. 88). In this case, the specific effect may be started immediately after the round end command is received, or specified at a predetermined start timing in the interval period following the end of the round game corresponding to the in-round effect that was being executed. You may make it start production. Further, the overall CPU 141 may start the specific effect when the effect control board 130 receives the round start command that instructs the start of the effect during the next round of the effect that is being executed. (See FIG. 88). This control is preferably performed, for example, when the round game corresponding to the in-round production being executed is not the round game of the final round.

  In addition, when the effect during the round being executed is the effect during the round related to the round game of the final round, the ending effect is performed following the effect during the round. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, when the ending effect including the notification effect is performed, the notification effect is given priority over the specific effect. For this reason, when the start time of the specific effect is reached when the general CPU 141 performs the effect during the round related to the round game of the final round, a command next to the ending command (a change start command or a customer waiting command) Triggered by the fact that the effect control board 130 has received a specific effect (see FIG. 88).

  However, in the case where an ending effect that does not include a notification effect is performed during the jackpot game ending period, the ending command is received by the effect control board 130 at the beginning of the ending period, or the ending period In the middle, a specific effect may be started.

  Then, the overall CPU 141 determines whether or not the end time of the specific effect has come, for example, based on whether or not the elapsed time since the start of the specific effect has reached a predetermined time during execution of the specific effect. If it is determined that the end time of the specific effect is reached, the specific effect being executed is ended. Note that a configuration may be adopted in which the specific effect being executed is immediately terminated when the end time of the specific effect is reached, but the specific effect may be terminated upon reception of a command by the effect control board 130. . The command reception trigger related to the end of the specific effect will be described later with reference to FIG.

[Operational effects by controlling the start timing of specific performance]
As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, since the game effect (variation effect or effect during the round) and the specific effect may be executed simultaneously, the effect of the effect is effectively enhanced by the synergistic effect of these effects. be able to. In addition, when the variation effect (or the effect during the round) is performed when the start time of the specific effect is reached, the specific effect is started after the variation effect (or the effect during the round) is finished. For this reason, it is possible to suppress the interest of the variation effect (or the effect during the round) from being impaired by starting the specific effect when the change effect (or the effect during the round) is performed.

  In other embodiments, regardless of the type of command, when the production control board 130 receives a new command, strictly speaking, a command corresponding to the new command is received by the image acoustic control board 140. Sometimes, a specific effect may be started. Strictly speaking, after the effect control board 130 receives a new command, the specific effect may be started after the image sound control board 140 receives a command corresponding to the new command.

[End timing control for specific effects]
The pachinko gaming machine 1 can execute a fluctuating effect (or an effect during a round) regardless of whether or not the specific effect is being executed. For this reason, it is possible to effectively improve the effect by the synergistic effect of the change effect (or the effect during the round) and the specific effect.

  The overall CPU 141 determines whether or not the specific production start time has come. This determination may be a determination as to whether or not the elapsed time has reached one hour, as in step S2104 in FIG. 39, or whether or not the current date and time indicated by the RTC 134 has reached a predetermined date and time. It may be a determination.

  If the overall CPU 141 determines that the start time of the specific effect has come, it starts the specific effect. The specific effect may be started immediately when it is determined that the start time has come, or may be started when the command is received by the effect control board 130 as described above with reference to FIG.

  For example, the general CPU 141 determines whether or not the end time of the specific effect is reached based on whether or not the elapsed time since the start of the specific effect has reached a predetermined time, and the end time of the specific effect is reached. If it determines, the specific production in execution will be complete | finished.

  By the way, if the specific effect is ended while the fluctuating effect (or the effect during the round) is performed, the effect is changed due to the effect change (for example, disappearance of the specific effect image) due to the end of the specific effect. There is a possibility that the interest of the fluctuating effect (or the effect during the round) may be impaired.

  Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, when the changing effect is performed at the end time of the specific effect (when the symbol is changing), after the changing effect ends (after the symbol change ends). When a specific production is finished and a production during a round is performed at the end time of the specific production (when a round game is in progress), after the production during the round is finished (after the round game is finished) The specific performance is ended.

  Hereinafter, the end trigger of the specific effect will be described with reference to FIG. Here, FIG. 89 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the end trigger of the specific effect.

  For example, based on whether or not the elapsed time since the start of the specific effect has reached a predetermined time corresponding to the specific effect, the overall CPU 141 has reached the end time of the specific effect. Determine whether.

  If the overall CPU 141 determines that the end time of the specific effect is reached, the general CPU ends the specific effect. At this time, it is determined whether or not the changing effect is being performed. If the changing effect is being performed, the specific effect is ended after the changing effect is ended. Specifically, the specific effect is ended when one of the following commands is received by the effect control board 130.

  The overall CPU 141 ends the specific effect when the effect control board 130 receives a symbol confirmation command for instructing the end of the changing effect being executed, for example (see FIG. 89). Further, the overall CPU 141 may end the specific effect when the effect control board 130 receives a change start command for instructing the start of the next change effect of the change effect being executed (see FIG. 89). This control is preferably performed, for example, when the special symbol determination is suspended at the end of the variation effect being executed.

  In addition, the general CPU 141 waits for a customer when a symbol waiting command is received next to the symbol determination command after the symbol control command is received by the effect control board 130 for instructing the end of the variation effect being executed. The specific effect may be ended upon reception of the command (see FIG. 89). This control is preferably performed, for example, when the special symbol determination is not suspended at the end of the variation effect being executed.

  On the other hand, the control when the end time of the specific effect is reached during the round game is as follows. That is, if the overall CPU 141 determines that the end time of the specific effect has come, the general effect ends. At that time, it is determined whether or not the effect during the round is being performed. If the effect during the round is being performed, the specific effect is ended after the effect during the round is ended. Specifically, the specific effect is ended when one of the following commands is received by the effect control board 130.

  The overall CPU 141 ends the specific effect when the effect control board 130 receives a round end command for instructing the end of the in-round effect, for example (see FIG. 89). In this case, the specific effect may be ended immediately after the round end command is received, or specified at a predetermined end timing in the interval period following the end of the round game corresponding to the in-round effect that was being executed. You may make it complete | finish an effect. The general CPU 141 may end the specific effect when the effect control board 130 receives a round start command for instructing the start of the effect during the next round of the effect that is being executed. (See FIG. 89). This control is preferably performed, for example, when the round game corresponding to the in-round production being executed is not the round game of the final round.

  Although not shown in the figure, when the ending effect that does not include the notification effect is performed during the jackpot game ending period, the specific effect may end after the ending period. . Further, the specific effect may be ended immediately after the ending command is received by the effect control board 130.

[Operational effects by controlling the end timing of specific performance]
As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, since the game effect (variation effect or effect during the round) and the specific effect may be executed simultaneously, the effect of the effect is effectively enhanced by the synergistic effect of these effects. be able to. In addition, when the variation effect (or the effect during the round) is performed when the end time of the specific effect is reached, the specific effect is ended after the change effect (or the effect during the round) is completed. For this reason, it is possible to suppress the interest of the variation effect (or the effect during the round) from being lost by ending the specific effect when the change effect (or the effect during the round) is performed.

  In other embodiments, regardless of the type of command, when the production control board 130 receives a new command, strictly speaking, a command corresponding to the new command is received by the image acoustic control board 140. Sometimes, the specific effect may end. Strictly speaking, after the presentation control board 130 receives a new command, the specific presentation may be ended after a command corresponding to the new command is received by the image sound control board 140.

  In another embodiment, when the special effect end time is reached in a state where the special symbol determination is suspended, the specific effect is ended after all the reserved special symbol determinations are digested. May be. For example, when three special symbol determinations are suspended when the end time of the specific effect is reached, the specific effect is ended after the three varying effects corresponding to the three special symbol determinations are ended. In other words, the specific effect ends with the reception of the symbol confirmation command instructing the end of the third variation effect and the reception of the variation start command instructing the start of the variation effect next to the third variation effect.

[Priority control of each production]
FIG. 90 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the priority of each effect. As illustrated in FIG. 90, the game effects performed in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are classified into a first game effect and a second game effect. Here, the first game effect is a game effect that is relatively low in importance among the game effects. For example, a variation effect (except for SPSP reach effect) and an effect during a round correspond to this. In addition, the second game effect is a game effect having a relatively high importance among the game effects, and the ending effect, the promotion effect during the round, the SPSP reach effect, and the like correspond to this.

  The specific effect is an effect different from the game effect that is performed when a predetermined time condition is started, and the new song announcement effect described above corresponds to this.

  The error notification effect is an effect of notifying the occurrence of a predetermined error event in the pachinko gaming machine 1. As illustrated in FIG. 90, the error events include a pan full error, a counter case error, a switch not connected error, a ball no error, a payout excess error, a payout command error, a door open error, an abnormal winning error, and a magnet detection error. Vibration detection errors, discharge errors, etc.

  The dish full tank error is an error that the dish 28 is full with game balls. When it is detected by a sensor (not shown) that the tray 28 is full of game balls, an error notification effect is output to output a message such as “please remove the ball”. The counter case error is an error that the game ball (prize ball) cannot be paid out due to a malfunction in the discharge mechanism such as a drive motor that sends the game ball from the ball tank provided on the back side of the game board 2 to the tray 28. is there. When this counter case error occurs, for example, an error notification effect is displayed to display an error message such as “Please call a staff member”.

  The switch disconnection error is an error that a disconnection of a wire connected to various detection switches such as the first start port switch 111 and the second start port switch 112 or a connection failure of the detection switch is detected. When this switch non-connection error occurs, a predetermined error notification effect corresponding to the switch non-connection error is performed. The no-ball error is an error that a game ball (prize ball) cannot be paid out because there is no game ball in the ball tank. When this sphere-free error occurs, a predetermined error notification effect corresponding to the sphere-free error is performed.

  The payout excess error is an error that game balls (prize balls) more than the number instructed by the main CPU 101 of the game control board 100 have been paid out. When this payout excess error occurs, a predetermined error notification effect corresponding to the payout excess error is performed. The payout command error is an error that a command for instructing payout of a game ball (prize ball) from the game control board 100 to the payout control board is not normally transmitted or received normally. When this payout command error occurs, a phenomenon occurs in which the game balls (prize balls) to be paid out are not paid out, so that a predetermined error notification effect corresponding to the payout command error is performed.

  The door opening error is an error that the frame member 3 that can be opened and closed via a hinge is open. When this door opening error occurs, for example, an error message such as “door is open” is displayed, and an error notification effect is output such that a predetermined warning sound is output at a high volume. An abnormal winning error is detected when the game ball winning in the grand prize opening 13 is detected by the big prize opening switch 115 when the round game is not being played, or when the electric tulip 17 is not activated. This is an error such that a winning of a game ball is detected by the second start port switch 112. When this abnormal winning error occurs, a predetermined error notification effect corresponding to the abnormal winning error is performed.

  The magnet detection error is an error that a magnetic detection sensor (not shown) detects that a magnet has been brought close to the glass plate supported by the frame member 3. When this magnet detection error occurs, a predetermined error notification effect (for example, output of a predetermined warning sound) corresponding to the magnet detection error is performed. The vibration detection error is an error that the vibration of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is detected by a vibration detection sensor (not shown). When this vibration detection error occurs, a predetermined error notification effect (for example, output of a predetermined warning sound) corresponding to the vibration detection error is performed. The discharge error is detected when the game ball detected by the first start port switch 111, the second start port switch 112, the big winning port switch 115, the normal winning port switch 117, the V winning port switch 120, or the lose prize port switch 121 is This is an error that is not detected by a discharge switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 2. When this discharge error occurs, a predetermined error notification effect corresponding to the discharge error is performed.

  In this way, there are other effects that are performed in the pachinko gaming machine 1 during the game, but if roughly divided, there are four effects of the first game effect, the second game effect, the specific effect, and the error notification effect. It is classified as a type of production.

  By the way, by performing a specific effect different from the game effect as described above, it is possible to improve the interest of the effect and suppress the monotonous game. However, if a specific effect is actively performed until the second game effect, which is highly important for the game, such as an ending effect or a promotion effect during the round, the player will grasp important information about the game. It becomes difficult and may interfere with the game. Also, a similar problem may occur when a game effect or a specific effect is given priority over an error notification effect.

  For this reason, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, when it is necessary to execute the first game effect and the specific effect, the specific effect is given priority over the first game effect. Further, when it is necessary to execute the second game effect and the specific effect, the second game effect is given priority over the specific effect. In addition, when it is necessary to perform an error notification effect and another effect, the error notification effect is given priority over the other effects. That is, as illustrated in FIG. 90, the specific effect has priority over the first game effect, the second game effect has priority over the specific effect, and the error notification effect has more priority than the second game effect. Takes precedence.

  The control ROM 144 (see FIG. 12) of the image sound control board 140 stores priority information indicating the priority for each of the four types of effects illustrated in FIG. When there is a need to simultaneously execute two or more effects among the four effects, the overall CPU 141 of the image sound control board 140 is based on the priority information of each effect stored in the control ROM 144. To identify the production with the highest priority. While the specified effect is actively executed, other effects that should be executed simultaneously with this effect are passively executed.

  For example, when it becomes necessary to execute the first game effect and the specific effect, the overall CPU 141 displays the image of the first game effect in the lower area, and negatively executes the first game effect. The specific effect is actively executed by displaying the image of the specific effect in the upper area wider than the lower area (see, for example, FIG. 14).

  In addition, when it becomes necessary for the overall CPU 141 to execute the second game effect (for example, SPSP reach effect) and the specific effect, the image of the second game effect is displayed in the entire area and the image of the specific effect is reduced. Then, by superimposing and displaying the image on the second game effect, the second game effect is given priority over the specific effect (see, for example, FIG. 78C). Note that, unlike the game effect, the specific effect is not an effect that would hinder the game unless it is executed. For this reason, in order to prioritize the second game effect over the specific effect, as described above with reference to FIG. 87, the specific effect is performed when the second game effect (SPSP reach effect in the example shown in FIG. 87) is performed. It may not be possible. When it is necessary to execute the error notification effect and the specific effect, the error notification effect is given priority over the specific effect by superimposing and displaying the error notification effect image on the image of the specific effect. The specific effect may not be executed during the execution of the error notification effect. Further, for example, when the speaker 24 is used for two types of effects, voice control such that the effect sound of the effect to be prioritized is output at a louder volume than the effect sound of the effect not to be prioritized, or the effect to be prioritized When the production sound is output, acoustic control is performed such that the production sound of the production that is not prioritized is not output.

[Effects of priority control of each production]
By the way, in the conventional gaming machine, the production is controlled based on information related to the game controlled by the game control unit, so that the game is monotonous, for example, when it is difficult to obtain a determination result of executing the jackpot game. There is a problem that it is easy to become. On the other hand, in order to suppress the occurrence of such a problem, the applicant has come up with a configuration in which a specific effect different from the game effect is executed on condition that a predetermined time condition is satisfied. It was.
Thus, by performing a specific effect different from the game effect, it is possible to improve the interest of the effect, and as a result, to suppress the monotonous game. However, for example, an ending effect that informs the game state after the end of the jackpot game or a promotion effect during the round, such as an ending effect that is performed during a round game, is actively performed until a game effect that is highly important for a game is performed. If this happens, it becomes difficult for the player to grasp important information related to the game, and the game may be hindered.
In contrast, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, when it is necessary to execute the first game effect and the specific effect, the specific effect is given priority over the first game effect. For this reason, the interest of the production can be improved by the specific production. On the other hand, when it is necessary to execute the second game effect and the specific effect, the second game effect is given priority over the specific effect. For this reason, it can suppress that a specific production causes trouble in a game. Further, the specific effect is given priority over the first game effect, the second game effect is given priority over the specific effect, and the error notification effect is given priority over the second game effect. Therefore, execution of these four types of effects can be appropriately controlled according to the priority of each effect.

[Display control and schedule display of new song announcement effect]
As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, it is possible to simultaneously display an image of the new song announcement effect and an image of the game effect on the liquid crystal display device 5, but at this time, the image of the new song announcement effect is displayed. The image display on the liquid crystal display device 5 is controlled so as not to display a part or all of the game effect image to be displayed.

  Also, in the pachinko machine 1, when the start time of the new song announcement effect is reached, one new song announcement effect image among a plurality of types (12 types in the example shown in FIG. 40) of the new song announcement effect is displayed on the liquid crystal display device. 5 is displayed. On the other hand, the player uses the effect key 27 to select “Schedule”, which is one of the selection items on the menu screen (see FIG. 81B) displayed on the liquid crystal display device 5 in the customer waiting state. By doing so, it is possible to confirm the execution schedule of multiple types of new song announcement effects.

  FIG. 91 is a screen diagram showing an example of a schedule screen showing a schedule for new song announcement effects. When operation information indicating that “schedule” is selected in a state where the menu screen (see FIG. 81B) is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 5 is transmitted from the effect control board 130 to the image sound control board 140. As illustrated in FIG. 91, the overall CPU 141 displays a schedule screen on which images indicating execution schedules of a plurality of types of new song announcement effects are given to the calendar of the month including the current date indicated by the RTC 134. To display. In the schedule screen illustrated in FIG. 91, a new song announcement effect of new song A is performed in the week of November 3, 2013, and a new song announcement effect of new song B is performed in the week of November 10, the same year. It is shown that the new song announcement effect of the new song C is performed in the week of November 17 of the same year, and the new song announcement effect of the new song D is performed in the week of November 24 of the same year.

  The player can confirm the schedule of the new song presentation effect in last month (here, October 2013) by selecting the “up” direction with the effect key 27 while the schedule screen is displayed. By selecting the “down” direction, it is possible to confirm the schedule of the new song announcement effect in the following month (here, December 2013).

[Operation effect by display control and schedule display of specific effects]
Thus, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, when the game effect and the new song announcement effect are performed at the same time, a part or all of the image of the game effect is compared with the case where the new song announcement effect is not performed. Display control not to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 5 is performed. When a game is not being performed, a schedule screen showing the execution schedule of a plurality of types of new song announcement effects is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 5, so that the player can confirm the schedule for the new song announcement effects in advance. . Therefore, the player can enjoy the game with both the game effect and the new song announcement effect.

  In other embodiments, the schedule screen may be displayed not only when waiting for a customer but also when a game is being played.

  In addition, here, the case where the specific effect is one effect called a new song announcement effect has been described, but the specific effect is, for example, a pattern that is determined to be a big hit in a first period (for example, 5 minutes from a predetermined time). If it is determined that the jackpot is made in the first specific effect in which the specific effect display is performed during the fluctuation and the second period (for example, 5 minutes following the first period) different from the first period, it is outside these periods. There may be two effects that are different from each other in the kind of effect as the second specific effect in which the premier effect is likely to appear. A premier effect means that a special symbol indicating that the judgment result of the special symbol judgment is not a big win will not appear during the variable display of the symbol that will be stopped and displayed, and the judgment result of the special symbol judgment will be a big hit This is an effect that may appear during the change of the symbol that will be displayed in a stopped state, and an effect that has a lower appearance rate than other effects.

  As described above, when two types of specific effects are performed, the two schedule screens of the first schedule screen indicating the execution schedule of the first specific effects and the second schedule screen indicating the execution schedule of the second specific effects are liquid crystal. You may comprise so that it can display on the display apparatus 5 separately. Moreover, you may employ | adopt the structure which displays the schedule screen which a player can grasp | ascertain simultaneously the execution schedule of a 1st specific production and a 2nd specific production.

[Display control of new song presentation effect and first effect actor control]
As described above, the image sound control board 140 can simultaneously display an image of a new song announcement effect and an image of a game effect on the liquid crystal display device 5, but at that time, an image of a new song announcement effect is displayed. The image display on the liquid crystal display device 5 is controlled so as not to display a part or all of the game effect image to be displayed when not being played.

  In the following, the effect actor control by the lamp control board 150 will be described. Here, FIG. 92 is a block diagram illustrating a peripheral configuration of the lamp control board 150.

  As illustrated in FIG. 93, the lamp control board 150 may be connected to the first effect accessory 71 and the second effect accessory 72 in addition to the frame lamp 25 and the logo accessory 7. Here, the 1st production | presentation actor 71 is the production | presentation means which can perform one of the multiple types of productions including a new song announcement production. In other words, it is a production that has a plurality of types of operation patterns. The second effect item 72 is effect means capable of executing one effect related to the game effect. In other words, it is a production that has only one type of operation pattern.

  By the way, while the 2nd production | presentation thing 72 performs only one kind of production operation directly related to a game, the 1st production | presentation thing 71 other than the production operation which concerns on the game production directly related to a game. The director performs a production operation related to a new song announcement effect that is not directly related to the game.

  When a plurality of types of presentation operations can be performed in such one presentation unit, the following problems may occur. That is, since the new song announcement effect described above is started at a timing unrelated to the game using the game ball, the new song is performed when the first effect actor 71 is performing the effect operation of the game effect directly related to the game. There are cases where the execution of the performance operation related to the announcement effect is instructed, or conversely, the execution of the effect operation of the game effect directly related to the game may be instructed during the execution of the effect operation related to the new song announcement effect. In such a case, there is a possibility that the first performance actor 71 cannot be made to perform a normal performance operation.

  Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, priority is set for each effect operation of the first effect object 71, and the effect operation with the highest priority is executed with priority over other effect operations. Thus, it is possible to prevent the normal performance operation by the first performance actor 71 from being disabled.

  The production operations of the first production actor 71 and the second production actor 72 are controlled by the lamp control board 150 based on a command transmitted from the production control board 130. In the RAM of the lamp control board 150 (hereinafter referred to as “lamp RAM”), the command received by the lamp control board 150 from the effect control board 130 and various control information included in the command are stored as control data. A storage area is provided.

  FIG. 93 is an explanatory diagram for describing various control data stored in the storage area of the lamp control board 150. As illustrated in FIG. 93, the storage area of the lamp RAM includes four layers of a first layer, a second layer, a third layer, and a fourth layer. Here, the first layer is a storage area in which control data related to the rendering operation with the lowest priority is stored. The second layer is a storage area for storing control data related to the rendering operation having the second lowest priority after the rendering operation in which the control data is stored in the first layer. The third layer is a storage area for storing control data related to the rendering operation having the second lowest priority after the rendering operation in which the control data is stored in the second layer. The fourth layer is a storage area in which control data related to the rendering operation with the highest priority is stored.

  Although not shown in the figure, the ROM of the lamp control board 150 (hereinafter referred to as “lamp ROM”) stores priority information that predefines the priority of various commands received from the effect control board 130. Yes. In other words, this priority information is information indicating the priority of each of the multiple types of effects controlled by the lamp control board 150. On the other hand, when the CPU of the lamp control board 150 (hereinafter referred to as “lamp CPU”) receives a command transmitted from the effect control board 130, the priority of the command is specified based on the priority information. Then, the command is stored as control data in a layer corresponding to the identification result. Specifically, the following control data is stored in each layer.

  The first layer stores, as control data, a variable effect start command for an effect without reach and an effect start command during a round. Here, the change effect start command for the reachless effect is a command for instructing the execution of the effect operation accompanying the change effect that does not include the reach effect that causes the player to expect a big hit. In addition, the in-round effect start command is a command for instructing execution of the effect operation related to the long open round game in the jackpot game. Even if the rendering operation according to these commands is interrupted in the middle, there will be no major trouble, so these commands are stored in the first layer.

  The first layer stores a new song announcement operation start command in addition to a variation effect start command for a reachless effect and an in-round effect start command. This new song announcement operation start command is a command for instructing the execution of the production operation accompanying the new song announcement effect performed using the liquid crystal display device 5 and the speaker 24. In the pachinko machine 1, when the new song presentation effect is started, the video of the new song is reproduced in the upper area of the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 5, and the image of the fluctuation effect is displayed in the lower area narrower than the upper area. Is done. In other words, the new song announcement effect has a higher priority than the variable effect that does not include a reach effect that does not include a reach effect. For this reason, when a new song announcement operation start command is received, the control data of the variation production start command for the non-reach effect or the production start command during round stored in the first layer becomes the control data of the new song announcement operation start command. Rewritten.

  In the second layer, a variable production start command for a production with reach is stored as control data. Here, the variation effect start command for the effect with reach is a command for instructing execution of the effect operation associated with the variation effect including the reach effect that causes the player to expect a big hit. For example, when the start time of the new song announcement effect is reached when the reach effect having a relatively high reliability with respect to the jackpot is performed on the liquid crystal display device 5, the full screen display of the image of the reach effect is continued and the new song The presentation effect image is reduced and superimposed on the normal effect image (see FIG. 78C). In other words, in the liquid crystal display device 5, during the reach production having a relatively high reliability for the jackpot, the priority of the reach production is higher than the priority of the new song announcement production. Therefore, in order to match the priority with the display effect performed in the liquid crystal display device 5, the variable effect start command for the effect with reach is the second higher than the first layer in which the new song release operation start command is stored. Stored in the layer.

  In the third layer, an opening effect start command and an ending effect start command are stored as control data. Here, the opening effect start command is a command transmitted from the effect control board 130 at the start of the jackpot game opening, and when the opening effect start command is transmitted, the liquid crystal display device 5 starts the jackpot game. The player is informed of this, and the player is urged to make a right strike. The ending effect start command is a command transmitted from the effect control board 130 at the start of the ending of the jackpot game. When this ending effect start command is transmitted, the liquid crystal display device 5 indicates that the jackpot game ends. An effect to notify the player is performed.

  In this way, when the opening effect start command or the ending effect start command is transmitted, the liquid crystal display device 5 performs a display effect for informing relatively important information regarding the game using the game ball. On the other hand, when an effect operation by the first effect actor 71 is performed in a situation where such a display effect is being performed, there is a concern that the display effect may be hindered. For this reason, when the lamp CPU receives the opening effect start command or the ending effect start command, the lamp CPU stores these commands in the third layer higher than the second layer, and during the opening or ending, the lamp CPU The directing operation by the 1 staging actor 71 is prohibited.

  In the fourth layer, a short time notification command is stored as control data. Here, the time-shortening notification command is a command for instructing the first effector 71 to start the effect operation that causes the characters “R”, “U”, “S”, and “H” to emerge.

  By the way, the short time gaming state described in the first embodiment is an advantageous state for a player who can easily win a jackpot as compared to the normal gaming state. For this reason, it is a big point for the player to shift the gaming state to the short-time gaming state, the effect of notifying that the gaming state shifts to the short-time gaming state, and that the current gaming state is the short-time gaming state The effect to be notified is more important than other effects. Therefore, when the lamp CPU receives the time-shortening notification command, the lamp CPU stores the time-shortening notification command in the fourth layer higher than the third layer, so that the rendering operation relating to the short-time gaming state is performed with the highest priority. In the present embodiment, when the time notification command is stored in the fourth layer, the rendering operation that causes the characters “R”, “U”, “S”, and “H” to appear in the first rendering actor 71 is given the highest priority. Is executed.

  The lamp CPU stores the command received from the effect control board 130 in this manner in an appropriate layer based on the priority information, and based on each control data stored in the first layer to the fourth layer, The production operation by the first production actor 71 is controlled. Specifically, when a command from the production control board 130 is received and the command is stored in an appropriate layer, the highest layer among the layers storing the control data is identified and stored in that layer. The first effect actor 71 is caused to execute an effect operation according to the control data being performed.

  Similarly, when the effect operation being executed is finished, the lamp CPU identifies the highest layer among the layers in which the control data is stored, and uses the control data stored in the layer. The first effect actor 71 is caused to execute the corresponding effect operation.

  As is apparent from the description based on FIG. 93 so far, in the present embodiment, the priority storage information is a specific effect operation (in this case, a new song) that is not related to the game in the effect operation related to the game using the game ball. It is stored in the lamp ROM as information indicating that the priority is higher than the presentation effect operation).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 94, the first effect combination control process executed on the lamp control board 150 will be described. Here, FIG. 94 is a flowchart showing an example of the first effect accessory control process executed on the lamp control board 150.

[First stage effect control process by lamp control board 150]
Next, with reference to FIG. 94, the first effect combination control process executed on the lamp control board 150 will be described. Here, FIG. 94 is a flowchart showing an example of the first effect accessory control process executed on the lamp control board 150. The lamp control board 150 is transmitted from the image sound control board 140 via the command from the effect control board 130 and the effect control board 130 in a normal operation except for special cases such as when the power is turned on and when the power is turned off. 94, a series of processes illustrated in FIG. 94 are repeatedly executed at regular time intervals.

  As illustrated in FIG. 94, the lamp CPU determines whether or not a variation effect start command has been received from the effect control board 130 (step S4001). Here, if it is determined that the variation effect start command is received (step S4001: YES), the variation effect start command starts the variation effect related to the reachable effect based on the information included in the variation effect start command. It is determined whether or not it is an instruction (step S4002).

  When the lamp CPU determines that the received variation effect start command does not instruct the start of the variation effect related to the reachable effect (step S4002: NO), that is, instructs the start of the variable effect related to the effect without reach. If so, the priority of the variation production start command is specified based on the priority information stored in the lamp ROM, and the variation production start command is used as control data in the control data storage area of the lamp RAM. Store in one layer (step S4003). On the other hand, when it is determined that the received variation effect start command is an instruction to start the variation effect related to the reach presence effect (step S4002: YES), the change is based on the priority information stored in the lamp ROM. The priority of the effect start command is specified, and the change effect start command is stored as control data in the second layer in the control data storage area (step S4004).

  When the lamp CPU executes the process of step S4003, when the process of step S4004 is executed, or when it is determined that the variation effect start command is not received (step S4001: NO), the lamp CPU is in a round state. It is determined whether or not an effect start command has been received (step S4005). If it is determined that an in-round production start command has been received (step S4005: YES), the priority of the in-round production start command is specified based on the priority information stored in the lamp ROM, and the round The medium production start command is stored as control data in the first layer in the control data storage area (step S4006).

  When the lamp CPU executes the process of step S4006, or determines that it has not received an effect start command during a round (step S4005: NO), whether or not it has received a new song presentation effect start command from the effect control board 130 Is determined (step S4007). If it is determined that a new song announcement effect start command has been received (step S4007: YES), the priority of the new song announcement effect start command is specified based on the priority information stored in the lamp ROM, and the new song The presentation effect start command is stored as control data in the first layer in the control data storage area (step S4008).

  When the lamp CPU executes the process of step S4008 or determines that a new song presentation effect start command has not been received (step S4007: NO), the opening transmitted from the effect control board 130 ("OP in the drawing" It is determined whether or not an effect start command or an ending (indicated as “ED” in the drawing) effect start command has been received (step S4009). Here, when it is determined that the opening effect start command or the ending effect start command has been received (step S4009: YES), the opening effect start command (or the ending effect start command) is based on the priority information stored in the lamp ROM. ) Is specified, and the opening effect start command (or ending effect start command) is stored as control data in the third layer in the control data storage area (step S4010).

  When the lamp CPU executes the process of step S4010 or determines that the opening effect start command (or ending effect start command) has not been received (step S4009: NO), the lamp CPU issues a time reduction notification command from the effect control board 130. It is determined whether it has been received (step S4012). Here, when it is determined that the short time notification command has been received (step S4012: YES), the priority of the short time notification command is specified based on the priority information stored in the lamp ROM, and the short time notification command is The control data is stored in the fourth layer in the control data storage area (step S4013).

  When the lamp CPU executes the process of step S4013, or determines that it has not received a time reduction notification command (step S4012: NO), whether or not control data is stored in any layer in the control data storage area Is determined (step S4014). That is, it is determined whether the process of step S4003, the process of step S4004, the process of step S4006, the process of step S4008, the process of step S4010, or the process of step S4013 has been executed. Here, when it is determined that the control data is not stored (step S4014: NO), the series of first effect actor control processing ends, and the processing returns to step S4001.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the control data has been stored (step S4014: YES), the lamp CPU determines whether or not a new song presentation effect is being performed (step S4015). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the first stage actor 71 is operating. If it is determined that the first stage actor 71 is operating, it is determined whether or not the operation pattern is an operation pattern of a new song announcement effect. Based on this, it is determined whether or not a new song announcement effect is being performed. If it is determined that the new song announcement effect is not being performed (step S4015: NO), the process returns to step S4001.

  When the lamp CPU determines that the new song presentation effect is being performed (step S4015: YES), the lamp CPU executes priority determination for the control data stored in the control data storage area (step S4016). Specifically, the layer in which the control data is stored is determined from the first layer to the fourth layer, and the highest layer among the determined layers is specified. For example, when control data is stored in the first layer, the second layer, and the fourth layer, the fourth layer is specified as the highest layer. For example, when control data is stored in the first layer and the third layer, the third layer is specified as the highest layer. In this way, the lamp CPU specifies the layer in which the control data with the highest priority is stored.

  Following the processing of step S4016, the lamp CPU determines whether or not the other production operation has a higher priority than the new song presentation production operation being executed by the first production actor 71 (step S4017). Specifically, based on whether the layer identified in the process of step S4016 is higher than the second layer higher than the first layer in which the control data related to the new song presentation effect is stored, other effect operations It is determined whether or not the priority is higher.

  In this way, the lamp CPU can execute the effect operation of effects other than the new song announcement effect when the first effect object 71 is performing the effect operation of the new song announcement effect among the plurality of types of effect operations. If it is, it is determined whether or not the priority of the production operation of the production other than the new song announcement production is higher than the production operation of the new song announcement production being executed.

  When the lamp CPU determines that the other performance operation has a higher priority (step S4017: YES), the lamp performance CPU 71 interrupts the performance operation of the new song announcement effect that is being executed by the first performance object 71 and performs the other performance operation. Is started (step S4018).

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the priority is not higher in the other effect operations (step S4017: NO), the series of first effect actor control processes is ended, and the process returns to step S4001. In this case, the lamp CPU performs a process for causing the first effect actor 71 to continuously execute the effect operation of the new song announcement effect being executed.

  Although a detailed description is omitted, a series of processing after step S4016 is performed in a stage where the first stage actor 71 differs from the new song presentation stage when new control data is stored in the control data storage area. The same operation is performed when an operation is being executed.

  Although not shown in the drawing, when it is necessary to execute one effect operation by the second effect agent 72, the lamp CPU preferentially executes which effect operation of the first effect agent 71. Regardless of whether or not the second effect actor 72 performs one effect operation.

[Operation effect by display control of new song announcement effect and first effect actor control]
As is apparent from the above description, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, when the game effect and the new song announcement effect are simultaneously performed on the liquid crystal display device 5, the image of the new song announcement effect is not displayed. Display control is performed on the image sound control board 140 such that a part or all of the game effect image to be displayed is not displayed on the liquid crystal display device 5. For this reason, the player can enjoy the game with both the game effect and the new song announcement effect.

  In addition, when the first performance actor 71 is performing the performance operation of the new song announcement effect, if it is possible to perform the performance operation of the performance other than the new song announcement effect, the performance other than the new song announcement effect has priority. If the degree is high, the production operation of the new song announcement effect is interrupted, and the production operation of the production other than the new song announcement effect is executed. On the other hand, if the direction other than the new song announcement effect has a lower priority, the new song announcement effect operation is continuously executed. Therefore, it is possible to cause the first effect actor 71 that cannot simultaneously execute a plurality of effect operations to appropriately execute the effect.

  In addition, although the case where the first effect means and the second effect means are the first effect role 71 and the second effect role 72 has been described here, the first effect means and the second effect means may be both or any of them. One of them may be an effect means (for example, a lamp) different from the effect actor.

1 Pachinko machine (an example of a game machine)
DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 4 Display 5 Main liquid crystal display device 6 Sub liquid crystal display device 10 Game area 11 1st starting opening 12 2nd starting opening 13 Large winning opening 16 Gate 17 Electric tulip 19 Specific winning opening 24 Speaker 41 First special symbol display 42 Second 2 Special symbol display device 71 First effector 72 Second effector 100 Game control board 101 Main CPU
102 Main ROM
103 Main RAM
130 Production control board 131 Sub CPU
132 Sub ROM
133 Sub RAM
134 RTC
140 Image Sound Control Board 141 General CPU
142 VDP
143 Acoustic DSP
144 ROM for control
145 RAM for control
146 ROM for sound
147 SDRAM
148 CGROM
149 VRAM
150 Lamp control board 1491 Display list storage area 1492 Development storage area 1493 Full screen frame buffer 1494 Reduced image frame buffer 1495 Main liquid crystal frame buffer 1496 Sub liquid crystal frame buffer

Claims (1)

A gaming machine comprising a game control unit for controlling the progress of a game and an effect control unit for controlling the effect,
The game control unit
Special game determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player when a predetermined start condition is satisfied;
Special game execution means for executing the special game when the special game is determined by the special game determination means to execute the special game,
The production control unit
In accordance with the game controlled by the game control unit, a game effect executing means for executing a predetermined game effect;
Time condition determining means for determining whether or not a predetermined time condition is satisfied;
A specific effect executing means capable of executing a specific effect different from the game effect when the time condition determining means determines that the predetermined time condition is satisfied ;
An error notification effect executing means for executing an error notification effect for notifying the occurrence of a predetermined error event in the gaming machine ,
When the execution time of the specific effect is during the execution time of the predetermined game effect, the specific effect is prioritized or emphasized over the predetermined game effect,
The error notification effect is prioritized or emphasized over the specific effect,
Before the execution period of the specific effect, display the time until the start of the specific effect in a predetermined display area of the display means,
A gaming machine, wherein during the execution period of the specific effect, an effect display indicating that the specific effect is being executed is performed in the predetermined display area.

Images